Home

ISO: User's Manual TNC 407, TNC 415B, TNC 425

1. 6 2 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 1 Subprograms Programming and calling subprograms Mark the beginning Select the label setting function l The subprogram begins with for example label number 5 Resulting NC block G98 L5 Mark the end A subprogram always ends with label number 0 a D Select the label setting function Resulting NC block G98 LO Cali the subprogram A subprogram is called by its label number B5 O Call the subprogram behind label 5 Resulting NC block L5 0 at The command L0 0 is not permitted label Ois only used to mark the end of a subprogram TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 l 6 3 6 6 1 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Subprograms Example for exercise Group of four holes at three different locations The holes are drilled with cycle G83 PECKING Enter the setup clearance feed rate etc in the cycle once You can then call the cycle with miscellaneous function M99 see page 8 3 Coordinates ofthe first hole in each group Group D X 215mm Y 10mm Group X 245mm Y 60mm Group 75mm Y i0mm Hole spacing X 20mm Y 2 20mm Total hole depth Z 10mm Hole diameter 5mm Part program POA 715 i Ae ke eet deu cafe N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 2 20 TE N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L40 R 2 5 isses N4
2. ean TORE TR inhibiting the editor for certain file types Input value 0 to 63 sum of the individual values in the Value column If you do not wish to inhibit the editor for a particular file type use the value 0 MP 7224 1 Inhibit editor for HEIDENHAIN programs ISO programs Tool tables Datum tables Pallet tabies Text files TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams A 11 1 General User Parameters Activating tables lf you do not want to activate any tables enter 0 Parameter Function Value MP 7226 0 Number of pallets per pallet file 0 to 255 MP 7226 1 Number of datums per datum table 0 to 255 MP 7260 Number of tools per tool table eseesesseeeeeerm eene O tO 254 MP 7261 Number f pockets per pocket table Making a tool and pocket table Tool name NAME MP 7266 0 Tool number T MP 7267 0 Tool length L MP 7266 1 Special tool ST MP 7267 1 Tool radius R MP 7266 2 Fixed pocket F MP 7267 2 Tool radius R2 MP 7256 3 Pocket locked L MP 7267 3 Oversize length DL MP 7266 4 PLC Status PLC MP 7267 4 Oversize radius DR MP 7266 5 Oversize radius 2 DR2 MP 7266 6 Tool locked TL MP 7256 7 Replacement tool RT MP 7266 8 Maximum tool life TIMET MP 7266 9 Maximum tool life for TOOL CALL TIME2 MP 7266 10 Current tool age CUR TIME MP 7266 11 Tool comment DOC MP 7266 12
3. eeeeeees 10 4 Setting the RS 232 interface ees aanhet eia Setting the RS 422 interface sccscsssssesecssesessseessesscceceesseseocseceaceeteensonesesaensncene Selecting the OPERATING MODE Downward compatibility esee Setting the baud Tate esee eiat tee pides exse eee prag pepe E PRIN EG and PRINT STEST iir ai roter voter eruta vant on epe et ep oae ee coeno seen 10 5 Machine Specific User Parameters 2 eere eee eee rene 10 7 10 6 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space 10 7 10 7 Position Display Types esee eeee esce enn eren nennt 10 9 10 8 Unit of Measurement ccsesssssseccsssscoresersesessessscessosenesnesenass 10 10 10 9 Programming Language for SMDI esses 10 10 10 10 Axis Traverse Limits eeeeeeee eee eese seen sensn natat tanus neane 10 11 10 11 HELP MeS Mee ET 10 12 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters SX RRUR rS 11 2 Input possibilities for machine parameters sesssssee eene 11 2 Selecting general user parameters ssssssssssee sees eene nennt there enne 11 2 Parameters for external data transfer ssssssessssseeeeseeen nennen 11 3 Parameters for 3D touch probes essseisssssssse
4. Coordinates of the first hole X 5mm Y 10mm Hole spacing IX 15mm Number of holes N 6 Depth Z 10 Hole diameter Part program 96S66l G71 Jessie cens Start program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 u Define blank form N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 2 5 Lise ee Define tool N40 TIGIZ S3500 M aee te eie Cali tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MOG sess Retract and insert tool N60 X 10 Y 10 Z 2 MOS ous Pre position to the point which is offset in negative X direction by the hole spacing N70 GIS L1 rsen Uere estes Start of the program section to be repeated N80 G91 X 15 Lesser Move to drilling position incremental dimension N90 G01 G90 Z 10 F100 isuee Drill absolute dimension N100 G00 ZEZ S irin a eeepc phot etg urne Retract N110 L1 5 essere Call LABEL 1 repeat program section from block N70 to biock N110 five times tota of six holes N120 Z 100 M02 sss REIN Retract in the infeed axis N99999 96S66l G71 6 6 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 2 Program Section Repeats Example for exercise Milling without radius compensation using program section repeats Sequence Upward milling direction Machine the area from X 0 to 50 mm program all X coordinates with the tool radius subtracted and from Y 0 to 100 mm G98 L1 Machine the a
5. N28 G31 690 X 100 V 199 2 2 x papane one ee EE E diee Coordinates of the axes NSB Ti Gi S1508 e E pre NSG GOA Gae GSB 2 50 e Nga G S POI 2 PO2 20 PB3 10 Pes 109 PQS X 80 POG v 5a Par Saa e N70 K 50 V 50 M3 2 E 30 0800 Tilt angle of the working plane Display of a basic rotation RCTL H 213 0815 56 7797 2 84 9838 B 38 8000 t 90 0088 M 5 9 70 EH on TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 27 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Tool information pae ER TEST RUN Pii N38 981 Q53 PQI Q3 PQ2 023 NGG D91 O56 PO Q6 Pez 0128 NSO 068 O58 Pal Q8 gt N68 O84 O72 Pal 012 Pa2 Q26 e X78 DQ3 072 PQI 072 PQ2 029 N86 O22 Q P01 017 PQ2 07 gt N96 084 Q POI 07 PO2 027 N182 083 07 PQ1 Q7 Pez 023 e N1310 DO2 079 P01 Q18 PBZ 08 e Ni20 034 078 PO 078 PO2 026 e N130 003 076 POI Q78 PO 029 e N149 002 076 PO1 15 PO2 06 N158 004 076 Pat 076 P22 026 N168 D33 076 PQI Q 6 PO2 029 N4170 654 X Q1 V 02 Z 053 status status status status E cor a ROM Pos TOOL mar T Tool name and number RT Name and number of a replacement tool Tool axis Tool length and radii OL DR TR8 9 2500 8 1230 GH Oversizes delta values CUR TIME 94 13 TIME 97 38 TIMEZ 26 48 TOOL CALL 1 SCHRUPP1 RT e 12 Too
6. BEER u m TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 11 10 MOD Functions 10 11 HELP files Help files are a way to find information quickly that you would otherwise have to search for in a manual Help files can aid you in situations in which you need clear instructions before you can continue for example to retract the tool after an interruption in power The miscellaneous func tions may also be explained in a heip file Help files are not provided on every machine Your machine tool builder can provide you with further information on this feature To call help files Select the MOD functions Call the last active HELP file if desired five Call other HELP files BOMMaNDS FOR THE TOOL CHANGER 0001 CHAIN FORWARD 0082 CHAIN BACKWARD CENDJ 250 3680 x 331 6888 M 5 8 cm sm ple OVERUR ITE TEXT TEXT Fig 10 7 HELP file in a machine operating mode aed 10 12 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 7 General User Parameters eee 1122 input possibilities for machine parameters mener 11 2 Selecting general user parameters sssssssssseseeeee mee EAD Parameters for external data transfer 113 Parameters for 3D touch probes ete deti On eels d teste EEEE EE ITED Parameters for TNC displays and the editor Ets Parameters for machining and program run seen i
7. Eu OM Tr rT tt 6 f Doc L 53 FILE S 155904 BYTES URCRNT SELECT copy SELECT WINDGU TT Se 8 are ev Fig 1 37 Files are sorted alphabetically and according to type Show the file directory in one or two columns The selected layout is shown in the soft key TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 29 1 introduction 1 5 Files File status The letters in the STATUS column give the following information about the files E File is seiected in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING operating mode S File is selected in the TEST RUN operating mode M File is selected in a program run operating mode P File is protected against editing and erasure IN Fite contains inch dimensions W File has been transferred to external storage and cannot be run Selecting a file Call the file directory PAGE SELECT COPY SELECT WINDOW RES oo initially only HEIDENHAIN dialog type H files are shown Other files are shown via soft key Select the file type TYPE SPOL ALL Show all files You select a file by moving the highlight bar Move the highlight bar vertically to the desired file PAGE Move pagewise down up ili through the file directory SELECT Select the highlighted file zu 1 30 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 introduction 1 5 Files To copy a file Mode of operation PROGRAMMING AND EDITING Cali the file directory Move the highlight bar to the file you wish to copy for example
8. N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MOG Fenn PE woh satzescea tenes eod ds Pre position in the working plane N60 X 50 Y 40 N70 Z5 MOS N80 i 50 J 50 N90 G01 G41 X450 Y 0 F100 LL N110 G02 X 50 Y 0 N120 G27 R10 N130 G00 G40 X 50 Y 40 N140 Z 100 MQ2 eese e teava N99999 9685201 G71 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Start of program Blank form MIN point Blank form MAX point Define tool Call tool Retract and insert tool Move tool to working depth Coordinates of the circle center Move to first contour point with radius compensation at machining feed rate N300 G26 RIO iio ete terit tod renee Soft tangential approach Mill arc around circle center J negative rotation coordinates of end point X 50 mm and Y 0 Soft tangential departure Depart contour cancel radius compensation Retract in the infeed axis Continued on next page 7 5 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 1 Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values Part program with Q parameters 96S 744 G71 essent Start Of program N10 DOO Q1 POI 100 sees Clearance height N20 DOO Q2 POT 30 essere Start position X N30 DOO Q3 P01 20 esssssssessssessssss Start end position Y N40 DOO Q4 POI 70 esee End position X N50 DOO Q5 POI 5 oo eeeccceceeesectessnscessesseeanenes Milling depth N60 DOO Q6 P01 50 ooo essere Circle center X N70 DOO Q7 POT 50 ou ccs ceccecnsesscasee
9. TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC407 9 7 10 MOD Functions 10 1 Selecting Changing and Exiting the MOD functions PEETERS 10 3 10 2 Software Numbers and Option Numbers eee 10 3 10 3 Code Numbers P PS 10 3 10 4 External Data Interfaces ccsccsscsssssscsecesscesesateerscereesssessseesenens 10 4 Setting the RS 232 interface er a aa ai aea eR ara R aaie aare 10 4 Setting the RS 422 interface 00 0 cccecccesceeceneceeeseeneesseasseseesaeserecssssseseseseceeassreesoeee 10 4 Selecting the OPERATING MODE ou eee eescecneeseneeeseseretenersseceecaeeseeere m 10 4 Downward cormpatibility cie acl ettet coe ese e ERE e Sees aea daa ena ee te don 10 5 Setting the baud rate 2 eee eee cc ceeeeecceencecesecenseesececsceessseeseessesseesaeenseeeesaenesessaneacss 10 5 ASSIGN inei rea tentus Opec E T hatin tyre fai dos reed 10 5 PRINT and PRINTSTEST nie ta t eie a ai oce et e ede nee dicc 10 6 10 5 Machine Specific User Parameters ccccessssseeterserasseseners 10 7 10 6 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space 10 7 10 7 Position Display Types eeeeeeee eee eeee esee eene nennen sereni 10 9 10 8 Unit of Measurement ccccescssesesssessesescssrossesseseseeensetsaeseesenenees 10 10 10 9 Programming Language for MDI CURE 10 10 10 10 Axis Traverse Limits cccsccccesee
10. 4 Programming 49 TextFiles Editing text blocks With the editor text blocks sections of text of any size can be or Shift the soft key row onum RR RN as P M Q SELECT REMOVE INSERT BLOCK BLOCK BLOCK selected deleted inserted at the same or other locations copied even whole files To select a block Place the cursor at one end of the block and press SELECT BLOCK Then move the cursor to the other end The selected block has a different color than the rest of the text Delete the selected text and store temporarily Insert the temporarily stored text at the cursor location Store marked block temporarily without erasing Transfer the selected text to another file Type the name of the target file in the screen dialog line and press ENT The TNC appends the selected text to the end of the specified file You can also create a new file with the selected text in this way insert another file at the cursor position Write the name of the source file in the screen dialog line and press ENT REMOVE INSERT BLOCK REMOVE BLOCK INSERT BLOCK REMOVE INSERT BLOCK APPEND To FILE ll Tee APPEND READ TO FILE FILE ec Nt ST a 430 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming A o TT 49 TextFiles f Exercise Move the last four lines in the file ABC A to the beginning of the fi
11. Block 2 Tool axis MIN point coordinates N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z40 sk Block 3 MAX point coordinates N99999 NEW G7L Block 4 Program end name dimensional unit The dimensional unit used in the program appears behind the program name C71 millimeters TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 5 Entering Tool Related Data Besides the too data and compensation you must also enter the following information Feed rate F Spindle speed S Miscellaneous functions M The tool related data can be determined with the aid of diagrams see page 11 20 Fig 4 15 Feed rate F and spindle speed S of the too Feed rate F The feed rate is the speed in millimeters per minute or inches per minute at which the tooi center moves input range F 0 to 30 000 mm min or 1181 ipm TNC 425 300 000 mm min or 11 811 ipm The maximum feed rate is set individually for each axis by means of machine parameters input gt eg agog Enter the feed rate for example F 100 mm min Rapid traverse Rapid traverse is programmed directiy with GOO Duration of feed rate F A feed rate entered as a numerical value remains in effect until the control encounters a block with a different feed rate If the new feed rate is GOO rapid traverse then after the next block with GO1 the feed rate will return to the last feed rate entered as a numerical value Changing the feed rate F You
12. N240 GOO Z 10 N250 X 120 G91 Y 2 5 N260 2 40 Fes tale edere etta bte ve e edes Call LABEL 2 repeat program section from block N180 to N260 forty times N270 G90 Z 100 M02 sss REtract in the infeed axis N99999 968671 G71 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 7 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 3 Main Program as Subprogram Sequence A program is executed GD up to the block in which another program is calied block with 96 Then the other program is run from beginning to Q end The first program is then resumed beginning with B the block behind the program call 3 N99999 96 A N99999 96 B Fig 6 3 Flow diagram of a main program as subprogram jump B return jump Operating limitations Programs called from an external data medium e g floppy disk must not contain any subpro grams or program section repeats No labels are needed to call main programs as subprograms The called program must not contain the miscel laneous functions M2 or M30 The called program must not contain a jump into the calling program Calling a main program as a subprogram Call a plain language program Cali an ISO program Ls Call an externally stored program Resulting NC block NAME You can also cali a main program with cycle G39 see page 8 48 6 8 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 4 Nesting
13. 4 14 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 3 Tool Compensation Values For each tool the TNC offsets the spindle path in the tool axis by the compensation value for the tool length and in the working piane by the compensa tion value for the tool radius Fig 4 8 The TNC compensates both the length and radius of the tool Effect of tool compensation values Tool length Length compensation becomes effective automatically as soon as a tool is called and the tool axis moves Length compensation is cancelled by calling a tool with length L 0 If a positive length compensation was active before tool TO was called the distance to the workpiece will be reduced With a G91 movement in the tool axis after a tool call with T the length difference between the previous tool and the new tool will be traversed in addition to the programmed value Tool radius Radius compensation becomes effective as soon as a tool is called and is moved in the working plane with G41 or G42 Radius compensation is cancelled by programming a positioning block with G40 Tool radius compensation A tool movement can be programmed Without radius compensation G40 With radius compensation G41 or G42 As paraxial movements G43 or G44 Fig 4 9 Programmed contour and the path of the tool center rr MP A a NSSDOeOIob bbb v LM MMMMNEHSEREEEERIN EB md TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 15 4 Pro
14. N110 N120 N130 N140 N150 N160 N170 N180 G98 L1 G01 G41 X 10 Y 50 1 35 J 50 G03 X 10 Y 50 G98 LO G98 L2 G01 G42 X 90 Y 50 i 65 J 50 G03 X 90 Y 50 G98 LO Area of intersection Only the area overlapped by both A and B is to be machined Aand B must be pockets Amust start inside B N110 N120 N130 N140 N150 N160 N170 N180 ELS att The e subprograms an are ieee in ther main program on page 20 G98 L1 G01 G41 X 60 Y 50 1435 J 50 G03 X 60 Y 50 G98 LO G98 L2 G01 G41 X 90 Y 50 1 65 J 50 G03 X 90 Y 50 G98 LO Fig 8 20 Overlapping pockets area of inclusion Fig 8 21 Overlapping pockets area of exclusion Fig 8 22 Overlapping pockets area of intersection spe VOU ER NN Sg NT ST a E mA ee TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 21 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Subprogram Overlapping islands An island always requires a pocket as an additional boundary here G98 L1 A pocket can also reduce more than one island surface The starting point of this pocket must be within the first isiand The starting points of the remaining intersecting island contours must be outside the pocket 9688221 G71 N10 G30 G17 X40 Y 0 2 20 N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T L 0 R 2 5 N40 T1 G17 S2500 N50 G37 P01 2 P02 3 P03 1 N60 G57 P01 2 P02 10 P03 5 P04 100 P05 0 PO6 0 P07 500 N70 G00 G40 G90 Z 100 M06 N80 X 50 Y
15. PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE Uu 9 fm 3 3 3 a 3 o Q 8 D PROGRAMMING AND EDITING 2 TEST RUN Bo Program and file management NAME Select programs and files San Delete programs and files PGN Enter program call in a program Maps conversational programming only External data transfer Miscellaneous functions IH ie B ctu Moving the cursor and going directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions ag Er c D Move the cursor highlight Go directly to blocks cycles and parameter functions Override control knobs i 100 Feed rate 109 Spindle speed 50 150 50 es 150 AWW F Os Programming path movements conversational programming only pu Approach depart contour le Straight line amp Circle center pole for polar coordinates fan B bs Circle with center Circle with radius Tangential circle Chamfer 8 B8 NS P Corner rounding Tool functions conversational programming only DEF CALL Cycles subprograms and program section repeats conversational programming only CYCL E CYCL E3 ES Enter and call labels for subprogramming SES CALL and program section repeats Enter program stop in a program Enter or call tool length and radius Activate tool radius compensation Define and call cycles PROE Enter touch probe functions in a program Coordinate axes and numbers editing x a v Select coordinate axes or enter them intoa program
16. Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING ROT kK ROT ROTATION AN TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 13 2 Manual Operation and Setup eee 2 5 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe The following functions are available for setting the datum on an aligned workpiece Datum setting in any axis with PROBING POS Defining a corner as datum with PROBING P Setting the datum at a circle center with PROBING CC To set the datum in any axis Fig 2 14 Probing for the datum in the Z axis PROB ING C POS Enter the nominal coordinate of the datum 2 14 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 5 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe Corner as datum Fig 2 15 Probing procedure for finding coordinates of corner P PROB ING Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING P pi To use the points that were already probed for a basic rotation TOUCH POINTS OF BASIC ROTATION Transfer the touch point coordinates to memory Move the touch probe to a starting position near the first touch point of the side that was not probed for basic rotation Probe the workpiece Enter the first coordinate of the datum point for example in the X axis TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 15 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 5 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe Select the second coordinate Enter the second coordinate of the datum for example in the
17. Subprograms and program section repeats can be nested in the following ways e Subprograms within a subprogram Program section repeats within a program section repeat e Subprograms repeated e Program section repeats within a subprogram Nesting depth The nesting depth is the number of successive levels in which program sections or subprograms can call further program sections or subpro grams Maximum nesting depth for subprograms 8 Maximum nesting depth for calling main programs 4 Subprogram within a subprogram Program layout 9e UPGMS G71 e g N17 11 0 euer Call subprogram at G98 L1 e g N35 GOO G40 24100 M2 oe Last block of main program with M2 N36 G98L1 07 Subprogram 1 e g N39 L20 with call of subprogram 2 eg N45 G9B LO aeiee teresine eterne End of subprogram 1 E g N62 G98 LO End of subprogram 2 N99999 96 UPGMS G71 sssssessseee End of main program Program execution 1ststep The main program UPGMS is executed up to block 17 2ndstep Subprogram 1 is called and executed up to block 39 3rd step Subprogram 2 is called and executed up to block 62 End of subprogram 2 and return jump to the subprogram from which it was called 4th step Subprogram 1 is called and executed from block 40 to block 45 End of subprogram 1 and return jump to the main program UPGMS 5th step Main program UPGMS is executed from block 18 to block 35 Return jump
18. To reset MANURL OPERATION AND EDITING Set TILT WORKING PLANE to INACTIVE TILT WORKING PLANE PROGRAM RUN MANUAL OPERATION ACTIVE 12 5 98 65 6792 21 5938 114 4964 12 5808 Fig 2 21 Menu for manuali tilting in the MANUAL OPERATION mode M M M 2 26 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 4 R4 Me ETIN D d Runrimg a program testem ee tr Ee ad im et Ur adress HC Running a program test up to a certain block The display functions for test run oo ccc cccecese essei een ttem en terti Program RUM festo Running a part DrOgrarTi eccl odia rne opere a aE ER Beda NAT EAEE 34 Interrupting ACHING eere c ope rodeo toc eia dee e EAEE S e gU e e eae FEL epo me Yea ead 3 5 Moving machine axes during an interruption oo ee essent nee aterian 3 6 Resuming program run after an interruption hs lo yejte o F 295 1 nit ese Re turming t the CODtOUE ii rhe ries deer enero estt gd ep Ecke tod Optional Block Skip cecsesescssssseseessnesenensantesnensascerseesanseuetteeseee 37 10 Blockwise Transfer Testing and Running Long Programs 9 11 3 TestRun and Program Run 3 1 Test Run in the TEST RUN mode of operation the TNC checks programs and program sections for the following errors without moving the machine
19. in program blocks with radius compensation G41 G42 the TNC automatically inserts a transition arc at outside corners Smoothing corners with M90 At corners the tool moves at constant speed Advantages Fio 5 42 Standard contouring behavior at Asmoother more continuous surface G40 without M90 Reduced machining time Example application Surface consisting of a series of straight line segments Duration of effect Servo lag mode must be selected M90 is only effective in the blocks in which it is programmed d Indeperidentiy of of M90 j you can usen m chine gt parameter C MP7460 to to set atimit vafue up to which the tool moves at constant pem PEENE A ANo RO and fe eed pre See D Fig 5 43 Behavior at G40 with M90 nr a 5 36 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data Machining small contour steps M97 Standard behavior without M97 The TNC inserts a transition arc at outside corners If the contour steps are very small however the too wouid damage the contour In such cases the TNC interrupts program run and generates the error message TOOL RADIUS TOO LARGE amp X Fig 5 44 Standard contouring behavior without M97 when the control would not generate an error message Machining contour steps with M97 The TNC calculates the contour intersection see figure of the contour elements
20. z s 3 D EA T Decimal point IEO OCSE Arithmetic sign Polar coordinates conversational programming only Incremental dimensions Q parameters for part families or mathematical functions conversational programming only Capture actual position Skip dialog questions delete words Tr Confirm entry and resume dialog m F4 G End biock Clear numerical entry or TNC message El m Qo m m Abort dialog delete program sections Oo Eum TE 298 G 1 E NS 630 G17 X 0 eB 2 50 H10 G31 G86 X 100 V ige 2 20 N15 699 T1 LIB R 20 N20 11 G1 S200 2 N26 G01 G4 GSO 2558 F9996 Nes N39 G21 G90 X 30 V 5O e N35 GU1 C90 2 70 N40 G 1 G41 GSG Kee F500 N45 G90 i450 J 5G e NGO Gi2 691 H360 N55 GO1 G48 GSC X 30 F9598 m p N60 Gb1 690 2 48 See 2 1 cT NGS GO1 G41 699 X 15 F03 e N78 G12 691 H 360 GRAPHICS 2 TEXT J SPHT es SCREEN ct js How to use this manual qb This manual describes functions and features available on TNCs with the following NC software numbers or higher TNC modei l NC software TNC 407 243 030 10 TNC 415 B TNC 425 259 930 10 TNC 415 F TNC 425E 259940 10 The suffixes E and F identify export versions of the TNC The following functions are not available on the TNC 407 e Graphics during program run Simultaneous linear movement in more than three axes The export versions TNC 415 F
21. 2nd step Program section between biock 27 and block 20 is repeated twice 3rd step Main program REPS is executed from block 28 to block 35 4th step Program section between block 35 and block 15 is repeated once 5th step Repetition of the second step within step 2 6th step Repetition of the third step within step 4 71h step Main program REPS is executed from block 36 to block 50 End of program TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 11 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 4 Nesting Repeating subprograms Program structure UPGREP G71 eg N10 G98Li E ci NTE 120 ens serene ieee Call Subprogram N12 L12 retener Program section repeat e g N19 GOO G40 Z 100 M2 cece Last program biock of main program with M2 N20 L2 aussen nennen Otat OF subprogram e g N28 G98 LO oco eene End cf subprogram N99999 UPGREP G71 1 End of main program Program execution Ist step Main program UPGREP is executed up to block 11 2nd step Subprogram 2 is called and executed Srd step Program section from block 12 to block 10 is repeated twice so subprogram 2 is repeated twice 4th step Main program UPGREP is executed from block 13 to block 19 End of program 6 12 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 7 7 7 8 7 9 Part Families Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values 7 4 Describing Contours Through Mathematic
22. 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 Programming with Q Parameters Q Parameters are used for Programming families of parts Defining contours through mathematical functions An entire family of parts can be programmed on the TNC with a single part program You do this by entering variables called Q parameters instead of fixed numerical values Q parameters can represent information such as coordinate values feed rates rpm cycle data Fig 7 1 Q parameters as variables Q parameters are designated by the letter Q and a number between 0 and 119 Q parameters also enable you to program contours that are defined through mathematical functions In addition you can use Q parameters to make the execution of machining steps depend on certain logical conditions You can mix Q parameters and fixed numerical values within a pro gram You can enter the individual Q parameter functions either blockwise see page 7 7 or together in a formula through the ASCII keyboard see page 7 16 Use the soft key PARAMETER to select the Q parameter functions The following soft keys appear with which you can select function groups TRIGO JUMP DIVERSE FORMULA NOMETRY FUNCT ION rra ead 7 2 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters Basic arithmetic assign add subtract multiply divide square root Trigonometric functions if Then conditions jumps Other functions Enter formula directl
23. Display the position of the too datum rinena e AE E AEAEE Eaa S a aeaii Display the position of the tool face oo ects cecs tse aseneeneeececeeceneeassteneaseecaseessenessentesaeseecseneetcraestes TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 9 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters Display steps for coordinate axes X axis MP 7290 0 Y axis MP 7290 1 Z axis MP 7290 2 IV axis MP 7290 3 V axis MP 7290 4 MP 7290 Function Value Display step 0 1 mm isses EE UENIRE RR DEN DH EN 0 Display step 0 05 mm cece o EAE AAE EE 1 Display step 0O 01 mmm eniin ena d e e he ete ie eno Ie e Preces e E aia aaa 2 Display Step 0 005 mri tede endis ces o ees ae RE e PE ev a ein PEN Sees ERE eba ee POSUER 3 e Display Step 0 ulum 4 e Display Step 0 0005 rni Lii E EAE E stiles AEAEE E EE 5 Display step 0 0001 mm TNC 425 only 20 ccecssssssessesesccescencecnsesccceuserscestserescecsvecssscaraceececersssersensessnenens 6 Inhibit datum setting Input value O to 31 sum of values in the Value column If you do not want to inhibit a given axis for datum setting the value for that axis is 0 If datum setting is inhibited for all axes the TNC removes the DATUM SET soft key in the MANUAL OPERATION mode MP 7295 Function inhibit datum setting for X axis inhibit datum setting Tor Y axis oaa aa anar ae OC oh els tirer tet o anc cet idee e od ieu
24. Miscellaneous function spindle stop return 11 End of program a HEIDENHAIN a ee E UU DR JOHANNES HEIDENHAIN GmbH Dr Johannes Heidenhain Stra amp e 5 D 83301 Traunreut Deutschland 08669 31 0 7 9 fel Y RR ANF t notice e RIOU Contour cycles Sequence of program steps for machining with several tools G37 P01 List of subcontour programs Drill define call Contour cycle Pilot drilling G56 P01 Pre position cycle call Roughing mill define call i Contour cycle Rough out G57 P01 Pre position cycle call Finishing mill define call Contour cycle Contour milling G58 P0155 Pre position cycle call E End of main program return M02 Contour subprograms i G98 G98 LO Radius compensation of the contour subprograms Contour Sequence of programmed Radius contour elements compensation Inside Clockwise CW G42 RR pocket Counterclockwise CCW G41 RL G41 RL G42 RR Outside island Clockwise CW Counterclockwise CCW Coordinate transformations Activate Cancel Coordinate transformation Datum shift G54 X 20 Y 30 Z 10 G54 X 0 Y 0 Z 0 Mirror image G28 X G28 Rotation G73 H 45 G73 H 0 Scaling factor G72 F0 8 G72 F1 C Oparamster Detinitions D Function D Function 00 Assign 08 Root sum of squares c V a b 01 Addition 09 If equal
25. N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 laana Define workpiece blank N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 4 oo eeereeceeeesetteteeereeeee Define tool N40 T1 G17 S1500 1 Call tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 ssssssssessssssss Retract in the infeed axis N60 L1 0 sessessessesssseeeeneneee nennen WEFSION 1 Original size N70 G54 X 70 Y 60 i N80 G72 F0 8 N90 L 0 essere ennemi VerSIOn 2 shifted and reduced in size N100 G72 F1 Lesser Cancel scaling factor N110 G54 X 0 Y 0 Cancel datum shift N120 Z 160 M02 N130 G98 L1 Same as subprogram on page 8 40 N250 G98 LO N99999 9658471 G71 The corresponding subprogram see page 8 40 is programmed after M2 ee ee S 846 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 6 Other Cycles DWELL TIME G04 Application This cycle causes the execution of the next block within a running pro gram to be delayed by the programmed dwell time The dwell time cycle can be used for such purposes as chip breaking Activation i This cycle becomes effective as soon as it is defined Modal conditions such as spindle rotation are not affected Input data The dwell time is entered in seconds after G04 with F Input range 0 to 30 000 sec approx 8 3 hours in increments of 0 001 sec Resulting NC block N135 G04 F3 PROGRAM CALL G39 Application and activation Routines that are programmed by the user such as special drilling cycl
26. Square root 03 04 cai ES Cosine 08 Root sum of squares c v a b a lf equal jump 10 If unequal jump 11 if larger jump 12 if smaller jump Angle angle from c sin 6 and c cos Error number 5 Print 19 Assignment PLC marker TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 i 11 35 Sequence of Program Steps Milling an outside corner Function 1 Open or select program Entries Program name Unit of measurement in program Blank form for graphic displays Define tools Entries Tool number Tool length Tool radius Call tool data Entries Tool number Spindle axis Spindle speed Too change Entries Coordinates of tool change position Radius compensation Feed rate rapid traverse Miscellaneous function too change Approach starting position G00 G40 Entries Coordinates of starting position Radius compensation G40 Feed rate rapid traverse Miscellaneous function spindle ON clockwise G00 Move tool axis to working depth G01 G41 G42 Approach contour Entries Coordinates of first contour point Coordinate of first working depth Radius compensation for machining Machining feed rate Machining to last contour point Entries Enter ail required data for each contour element Depart contour G00 G40 Entries Coordinates of end position Feed rate rapid traverse Retract G00 M02 Entries Retract in the spindle axis
27. The subcontours are approached and departed on a tangential arc Each subcontour is finish milled separately Input data DIRECTION OF ROTATION Q9 Direction of the cutter path Clockwise 1 Counterclockwise 1 e PECKING DEPTH Q10 Dimension by which the tooi plunges in each infeed e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q11 Traversing speed during penetration FEED RATE FOR MILLING O12 Traversing speed for milling ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q14 Enter the allowed material for several finish milling operations if Q14 0 is entered the remaining finishing allowance will be cleared Prerequisites The sum of ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q14 and the radius of the finish mill must be smalier than sum of ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE O3 cycie G120 and the radius of the roughing miil This calculation aiso holds if G124 is run without having roughed out with G122 in which case 0 should be used for the radius of the roughing mill Example Rectangular pocket with round island Input parameters Milling depth Q1 15 mm Path overlap O2 1 Allowance side Q3 1mm Allowance depth Q4 imm Top surface of workpiece Q5 0 Setup clearance Q6 2mm Clearance height Q7 50 Rounding radius O8 10mm Direction of rotation Q9 1 Subcontours are defined in subprograms 1 and 2 Continued on next page memene e TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 i 8 33 8 el a e M Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group II 8 34 Part program 96S835l G71 p idees de exe de
28. To move one block forwards or backwards or To select individual words in a block e Press the horizontal cursor keys Press the vertical cursor keys To find the same word in other blocks E Display the same word in other blocks Inserting blocks New program blocks can be inserted behind any existing block except behind the N99999 block Select the block 8 6 N e g 5B Program new block TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 3 4 Programming 4 1 Creating Part Programs Editing and inserting words Highlighted words can be changed es desired simply overwrite the old value with the new one After entering the new information press a horizontal cursor key or the END key to confirm the change In addition to changing the existing words in a block you can also add new words Use the horizontal cursor keys to move the highlight to the block you wish to add words to Erasing blocks and words e Set the highlighted number to 0 e Erase an incorrect number Clear a non blinking error message Delete the selected word e Delete the selected block Erase program sections First select the last block of the program section to be erased B enna E 44 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 422 Tools Each tool is identified by a number The tool data consisting of the jength L radius R are assigned to the tool number The tool data can be entered
29. To program the MDI I file according to ISO set the PROGRAM INPUT function to ISO TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions 10 10 Axis Traverse Limits The AXIS LIMIT mod function allows you to set limits to axis traverse within the machine s actual working envelope Possible application to protect an indexing fixture against tool collision The maximum range of traverse of the machine tool is defined by software limit switch This range can be additionally limited through the AXIS LIMIT mod function With this function you can enter the maximum and minimum traverse positions for each axis referenced to the machine datum Fig 10 6 Orienting traverse limits to workpiece size Working without additional traverse limits To allow a machine axis to use its full range of traverse in an axis enter the maximum traverse of the TNC 99999 999 mm as the AXIS LIMIT To find and enter the maximum traverse Enter the values that you wrote down as LIMITS in the corresponding axes in the axis traverse limit values The toot raditis is not automatically compensate The traverse range limits and software cp come active as soon asthe reference points are passed Datum display The values shown at the lower left of the screen are the manually set datums referenced to the machine datum They cannot be changed in the menu
30. UNG Abis UNG 428 TNG 407 Oo E 2E 2E p t 5 2 TEST RUN RUN HEIDENHAIN v66L eunp TNC Guideline From the workpiece drawing to program controlled machining TNC operating Section in mode i manual Preparation Select tools Set workpiece datum for coordinate system Determine spindle speeds and feed rates Switch on the machine Cross over reference marks Clamp workpiece Set datum Reset position display with 3D touch probe Without 3D touch probe Entering and testing part programs Enter part program or download over external data interface Test part program for errors Test run Run the program block by block without tool Optimize the part program if necessary Machining the workpiece Insert tool and run program ih LEER ENCEINTE TS ET EP Controls on the TNC 407 TNC 415B and TNC 425 Controls on the visual display unit Toggle display between machining and programming modes GRAFHICS Switch over key for displaying graphics only J SPLIT program blocks only or both program blocks SCREEN and graphics LJ Soft keys for selecting functions in screen Xr o ae Shift keys for the soft keys Brightness contrast Typewriter keyboard for entering letters and symbois File names Q w E R comments M MET Machine operating modes MANUAL OPERATION EL HANDWHEEL POSITIONING WITH MDi oO PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK ooOeos
31. input data Enter the axes that you wish to mirror Note that the tool axis cannot be mirrored Cancellation This cycle is cancelled by entering G28 without an axis Fig 8 47 Mirroring a contour Fig 8 48 Repeated mirroring machining direction Fig 8 49 Datum located outside the contour to be mirrored TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations Example Mirror image A program section subprogram 1 is to be exe cuted once as originally programmed at position X 0 Y 0 CD and then mirrored once in X at position X 70 Y 60 MIRROR IMAGE cycle in a part program Start of program Define workpiece blank N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 140 R 4 i eeeeecesteeeeersessiveees Define tool N40 T1 G17 1500 oe essere sce sees Call tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z4100 esses REtract in the infeed axis Version 1 unmirrored N70 G54 X 70 Y 60 sse eene Shift datum N80 G28 X Activate mirroring N90 L1 0 Version 2 shifted and mirrored N100 G28 Cancel mirroring N110 G54 X 0 Y 0 Cancel datum shift N120 Z 100 M02 N130 G98 L1 Same as subprogram on page 8 40 N250 G98 LO N99999 9558441 G71 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 43 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations ROTATION G73 l Application This cycle enables the coordinate system to be rotated about the active datum in the machining plane within a program Activation Rotation becomes ac
32. 25 3584 Y 250 3600 25 8006 B 331 0008 12 5888 Fig 2 11 Menu for touch probe radius and center misalignr The TNC electronically compensates workpiece misalignment by computing a basic rotation You set the rotation angle to the desired angle in respect to the reference axis in the working plane see page 1 12 Fig 2 12 Basic rotation of a workpiece probing procedure for compensation right The broken line is the nominal position the angle H is being compensated Press the PROBING ROT soft key PROBING K ROT ROTATIONANGIE 7 Enter the nominal value of the rotation angle Move the ball tip A to a starting position near the first touch point 1 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 4 3D Touch Probes Probe the workpiece A basic rotation is kept in non volatile storage and is effective for all subsequent program runs and graphic simulation Displaying basic rotation Munt OPERAT 1 ON The angle of the basic rotation appears after ROTATION ANGLE whenever PROBING ROT is selected It is also shown in the additional status display see page 1 22 under ROTATION in the status display a symbol is shown for a basic rotation whenever the TNC is moving the axes ROTATION ANGLE FEA according to a basic rotation 25 3684 Y 250 3698 25 0008 B 331 88668 12 5888 Fig 2 13 Displaying the angle of an active basic rotation To cancel a basic rotation
33. DIST CHANGE MM INCH MM PROGRAM INPUT HEIDENHRIN NC PLC SOFTWARE NUMBER 259938 07S SOFTWARE NUMBER 252499 81 POSITION AXIS Fig 10 3 MOD functions in a machine operating mode TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions 10 1 Selecting Changing and Exiting the MOD functions To select the MOD functions if necessary Change to the desired mode of operation To change the MOD functions Use the arrow keys to move the highlight to the desired MOD function Page through the MOD functions until you find the desired function Repeatedly Close the MOD functions 10 2 Software Numbers and Option Numbers The software numbers of the NC and PLC are displayed in the MOD function opening screen Directly below them are the code numbers for the installed options only for conversational programming Digitizing option OPT 1 Digitizing and measuring touch probe options OPT 11 10 3 Code Numbers A code number is required for access to certain functions eo To cancel file erase and edit protection status P 86357 123 To select user parameters a a E TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 3 10 MOD Functions 10 4 External Data Interfaces Press the soft key marked RS 232 RS 422 SETUP to call a menu for setting the external data interfaces MODE OF OP Type of external storage device FE1 FE2 ME EXT1 EXT2 LSV2 BAUD RATE Sets the data transfer speed 110 to 38400 b
34. Entering tool data in tables A tool table is a file in which the tool data for all toois are stored together The maximum number of tools per table 0 to 254 is set in machine parameter MP 7260 On machines with automatic too changers the tool data must be stored in tool tables You can edit these too tables using special time saving editing functions Types of tool tables Too table TOOL T is used for machining e edited in a program run mode of operation All other tool tables are used for test runs and archiving e edited in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation qth If you copy a tool table into TOOL T for a program run the oid TOOL T will be overwritten Editing functions for tool tables The following functions help you to create and edit too tables BEGIN END TABLE TABLE PAGE PAGE t t NEXT LINE Move the highlight e Go to the beginning end of the table e Go to the next previous table page Go to the beginning of the next line Look for the too name in the tool table A MM 4 8 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 2 Tools To edit the tool table TOOL T D p aa or J PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE TOOL Select the tool table TOOL T TABLE Switch the EDIT soft key to ON To edit any tool table other than TOOL T Cail the file directory SELECT SHOW Shift the soft key row and show file type T cy TYPE Select the
35. Fig 4 18 MIN and MAX points define the biank form ait The ratio of the blank form side lengths must be less than 200 1 MIN and MAX points The blank form is defined by two of its corner points MIN point smallest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute values MAX point largest X Y and Z coordinates of the blank form entered as absolute or incremental values 4 18 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 4 Program Initiation To create a new part program Select the file directory NAME Select any file of type for example OLD I FILE NAME OLD 1 i A ee eG a a A Enter the name of the new file for example NEW MM ENT INCH NOENT Indicate whether the dimensions will be entered in millimeters G71 or inches G70 O G function for input of the MIN point Define the tool axis G17 means Z axis Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MIN points and conclude the block with END G function for input of the MAX point Entry as absolute value or as incremental value Enter in sequence the X Y and Z coordinates of the MAX point and conclude the block with END TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 19 4 Programming 4 4 Program Initiation 4 20 The following blocks then appear on the TNC screen as program text Block 1 Program begin name dimensional unit a N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 40 5k
36. For this operation the 3D touch probe is rotated by 180 The rotation is initiated by a miscellaneous function that is set by the machine tool builder in the machine parameter MP 6160 The center misalignment is measured after the effective ball tip radius is calibrated Fig 2 10 Calibrating the touch probe radius and determining center misalignment Select the calibrating function for the ball tip radius and the touch probe center misalignment MANUAL OPERATION X X Y Y TOOL AXIS Z RADIUS RING GAUGE 0 The touch probe contacts a position on the bore in each axis direction the effective ball tip radius is stored Determine the ball tip center misalignment or terminate the calibra tion function with END rotate the touch probe by 180 The touch probe contacts one position on the bore hole for each axis direction the touch probe center misalignment is stored TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 11 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 4 3D Touch Probes Compensating workpiece misalignment 2 12 Displaying calibration values UT OPERATION The effective length and radius of the 3D touch probe are stored in the TNC for use when the touch probe is needed again You can display the values on the screen with the soft keys CALL and CAL R TOOL AXIS H RADIUS RING GAUGE 25 EFFECT PROBE RADIUS 3 9996 EFFECTIVE LENGTH 12 7836 STYLUS TIP CENTER OFSET X 8651 STYLUS TIP CENTER OFSET Y 6 6699
37. Function e Column number of the data in the tool table ooo ccc cecececcsenaecesssceccceceseessecvecceecessseessseraesreseuene Column number of the data in the pocket table e Do not show data in the table o oo cece ecccseseassccreseceececccusssoesenececesecsecescansssscerccegnusecerseeensenesseesseneuesess e 11 8 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Pararneters Dialog language MP 7230 Function e National language ae cine ae ARo E A A oe T S A E EEEE OE Protect OEM cycles This parameter prevents the editing of any program whose name is the number of a machine manufacturer cycle OEM cycle MP 7240 Function Protect OEM Cycles uio Renee pa Spa ww nes San ud RETI RR ee Vue gena masia eripe legens a Eee e ue putei dd Do not protect OEM cycles Feed rate display in the MANUAL OPERATION mode of operation MP 7270 Function Display F 0 if one axis direction button is pressed Display F without value if more than one axis direction button is pressed oo kee cere reese tetas Display the feed rate of the slowest axis regardless of the number of axis direction keys pressed Decimai character MP 7280 Function The decimai character is a point e The decimal character is a comma nie ee cassette denen eue E aai ei cop sacttesaant eb Da dime ea arias Erben fusa dre Tool length in the coordinate display MP 7285 Function
38. ON To edit the pocket table LINE RN RN NNNM TOOL NUMBER FIXED POCKET YES ENT NO NOENT POCKET LOCKED YES ENT NO NOENT Pocket number of the tool Too number P 1 F Fixed tool number The tool is always returned to the same pocket L Locked pocket Special Too with large radius requiring several pockets in the tool magazine Enter the number of pockets to be tocked in front of and behind the special tool SPECIAL TOOL PLC STATUS TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Information on this tool that should be sent to the PLC 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Calling tool data The following data can be programmed in the NC block with T Toot number Q parameter Working plane with G17 G18 or G19 Spindie speed S To call tool data gt TOOL NUMBER Enter the number of the too as defined in the tooi table or in a G99 block for example 5 Select the spindle axis Z Enter the spindle speed e g S 500 rpm Resulting NC block T5 G17 S500 Tool pre selection with tool tables If you are using tool tables G51 pre selects the next tool Enter the too number or a corresponding Q parameter Tool change Automatic tool change If your machine has automatic tool changing capability the TNC controls the replacement of the inserted tool by another from the too magazine The program run is not interrupted Manual tool change To change the too manually stop the spindle a
39. Q1 Y Q2 Depart contour absolute to pocket center cancel radius compensation N330 Z 100 M02 eese Retract in the infeed axis N99899 965771 G71 7 22 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 9 Programming Examples Bolt hole circle Bore pattern distributed over a full circle The entry values are listed in the program below in blocks N10 N80 Movements in the plane are programmed with polar coordinates Bore pattern distributed over a circle sector The entry values are listed below in blocks N150 N190 O5 Q7 and O8 remain the same Part program LOGHKR GTT Lucus ee ce etse eie ade ee Load data for bolt hole circle 1 N10 DOO Q1 POT 430 esee emen Circle center X coordinate N20 DOO O2 PO1 70 esssssienenne Circle center Y coordinate N30 DOO Q3 POI 41 1 Number of holes N40 DOO Q4 PO1 25 lessees BOlt circle radius N50 DOO Q5 P01 490 1 eene Starting angle NGO DOO O6 POT O esessseser tenes Hole angle increment 0 distribute holes over 360 N70 D00 Q7 P01 2 ascenderet donee Setup clearance N80 DOO Q8 PO1 15 esseessssssseeeeren Total hole depth N90 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N100 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 2 0 N110 G99 T1 L 0 R 4 N120 T1 G17 S2500 N130 G83 P01 Q7 P02 Q8 P03 5 P04 0 POS 250 osuere gerade Ed eius Cycle definition Pecking N140
40. S is the spindle speed rpm and pis the thread pitch mm When a cycle is cheng run 4he spindie speed onida knob i is s disabled The feed rate override knob is ony active within a lirnited range preset by the machine manufacturer For tapping right hand threads activate the epitidle with M3 for left hand threads use M4 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 42 8 Cycles 8 2 Simpie Fixed Cycies Example Tapping with a floating tap holder Cutting an M6 thread at 100 rpm Tapping coordinates X 50mm Y 20mm Pitch p imm F Sxp F 100 1 100 mm min Setup clearance 3 mm Thread depth 20 mm Dwell time 0 4 s Feed rate 100 mm min TAPPING cycle in a part program 587 G71 Start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 2 20 leserens Define workpiece blank N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 3 N40 T1 G17 100 N50 G84 P01 5 P02 20 P03 0 4 P04 100 Define TAPPING cycle N60 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MOG Retract in the infeed axis insert tool N70 X 50 Y 20 MOS Pre position in the plane spindie ON N80 243 M99 Pre position in Z to setup clearance cali cycle N90 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis end of program N99999 968871 G71 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 7 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles RIGID TAPPING G85 Process The thread is cut without a floating tap holder in one or several passes Rigid tapping offers the foliowing advantages ove
41. TNC 415 B max 30 m min 1181 ipm TNC 407 max 30 m min 1181 ipm Max 99 999 rpm Min 0 1 pm 0 00001 in or 0 0001 TNC 407 TNC 415 F TNC 425 E 1 um Max 99 999 999 mm 3937 in or 99 999 999 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams MM MM M 11 5 Features Specifications and Accessories Accessories FE 401 floppy disk unit Applications Ail TNC contouring controls as well as TNC 131 TNC 135 Data transfer rate TNC 2400 to 38 400 baud PRT 110 to 9600 baud Disk drives Separate drive for copying capacity 795 kilobytes approx 25 000 blocks up to 256 files Triggering 3D touch probes Models Touch probe system with ruby tip and stylus with rated break point standard shank for spindle insertion TS 120 Transmission via cable integrated interface TS 511 Infrared transmission separate transmitting and receiving units Spindle insertion TS 120 manua TS 511 automatic Probing repeatability Better than 1 um 0 000 04 in Probing speed Max 3 m min 118 ipm Electronic handwheels HR 130 e For panei mounting HR 150 e Fixed axis handwheel for the HRA 110 adapter HR 330 Portable version with cable transmission includes axis address keys rapid traverse key safety Switch emergency stop button TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 l 11 27 11 Tables Ov
42. Trensmission stop through RTS ACUNG Cist od adie sone eating AE inactive Transmission stop through DC3 iat o AN EE EASE D EE EEEE decoys Character parity IS c a i aT Character parity Not desired Desired Number of stop bits 145 SLOP DITS E EA etre ater t eiecti 2 StOD DIIS Suo uo ence ee owe eee dai d eto ee PURO T istop Dit eerte te eicere tet pne oie etaed StOD 11 ETE E T hdc E EE ULT NT ur D Example Use the following setting to adjust the TNC interface EXT2 MP 5020 1 to an external non HEIDENHAIN device 8 data bits any BCC transmission stop through DC3 even character parity character parity desired 2 stop bits Input value 140 8 0 32 64 105 entry value for MP 5020 1 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 3 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 11 4 Generali User Parameters Interface type for EXT1 5030 0 and EXT2 5030 1 MP 5030 Function Cases Interface type Standard e M es Bi es tha et o feos Interface for blockwise transfer Define the control character for external data transfer Machine parameters MP 5200 to MP 5210 define ASCII characters as control characters for external data transfer Assignment to the interfaces EXT 1 MP extension 0 EXT 2 MP extension 1 Input values ASCII characters O to 127 ASCII character for l Value Start transmission STX e ASEllicnaracter End transmission ETX Data input 1st character H Data inpu
43. thread cutting rectangular and circular pocket milling slot milling milling pockets from a list of subcontour elements cylindrical surface interpolation Coordinate transformations Datum shift mirroring rotation scaling factor tilting the working plane not TNC 407 3D touch probe applications Touch probe functions for setting datums and for digitizing 3D surfaces optional Mathematical functions Basic operations x Trigonometric functions sine cosine tangent arc sine arc cosine arc tangent Square root of values Va and root sum of squares Ya b Squaring SQ Square roots A Negation NEG Forming an absolute number ABS Forming an integer iNT Dropping the values before the decima point FRAC Comparisons greater than less than equal to not equal to e TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 25 11 Tabies Overviews and Diagrams 11 26 TNC Specifications Block execution time Control loop cycle time Data transfer rate Ambient temperature Traverse range Traversing speed Spindle speed input range 4 ms block TNC 407 25 ms block TNC 425 Contouring interpolation 3 ms Fine interpolation 0 6 ms speed TNC415B Contouring interpolation 3 ms Fine interpoiation 0 6 ms contour TNC 407 6ms Max 38 400 baud Operation 0 to 45 C 32 to 113 F Storage 30 to 70 C 22 to 158 F Max x 100 m x 2540 in TNC 425 max 300 m min 11 810 ipm
44. 1 MO8 Coolant ON M09 Coolant OFF M13 Spindle ON clockwise Coolant ON Mi4 Spindle ON counterclockwise Coolant ON 30 Same as M02 89 Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modal 99 Cycle call non modal 90 Constant contouring speed at inside corners and uncompensated corners 91 Coordinates in positioning block are referenced to the machine datum 92 Coordinates in positioning block are referenced to a position defined by the machine builder M93 Reserved M94 Reduce display of rotary axis to value under 360 M95 Reserved M96 Reserved 97 Path compensation on outside corners points of intersection instead of transition arc 98 End of path compensation non modal z M101 Automatic tool change with sister tool if maximum tool life has expired M102 Reset M101 M103 Reduce plunging rate to factor F percent M104 Reserved M105 Machining with first Kv factor M106 Machining with second Kv factor M107 Suppress error message with sister tools with oversize with blockwise transfer M108 ResetM107 M109 Constant contouring speed at the tool cutting edge on inside and outside corners M110 Constant contouring speed at the tool cutting edge on inside corners M111 Feedrate refers to the tool path center standard setting M112 Insert rounding arc between two straight lines enter tolerance E M113 ResetM112 M114 Automatic compensation of
45. 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Example for exercise Chamfering a corner Coordinates of the corner point E Length of chamfer Tool radius Milling depth Part program S5141 G71 Begin the program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 2 20 Workpiece blank MIN point N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 Workpiece blank MAX point N30 G99 T5 L 5 R 10 Define the tool N40 T5 G17 S2000 Call the tool N50 GOO G40 GSO Z 100 M06 Retract and insert too N60 X 10 Y 5 eee eeeeresteereseeseterteseerterteeererereees PTe position in the working plane N70 Z 15 MOS Move tool to working depth move spindle to N80 G01 G42 X45 Y 5 F200 contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate N90 X495 sssseeeeeeeeee ees eene tnter eene FIISt Straight line for corner E N100 G24 R10 insert chamfer with length 10mm N110 Y 100 Second straight line for corner E N120 G00 G40 X 110 Y 110 Depart the contour cancel radius compensation N130 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis N99999 96S5141 G71 a n s n RR R 5 14 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Too Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Circles and circular arcs Here the TNC moves two axes simultaneously in a circular path relative to the workpiece Fig 5 19 Circular arc and circle center Circle center 1 J K You can define the circle center for circular move ment A circle center also serves as ref
46. 50 MOS N90 Z 2 M99 N100 Z 100 MO2 N110 G98L1 N120 G01 G41 X 5 Y 5 N130 X 95 N140 Y 95 N150 X 5 N160 Y 5 N170 G98LO N180 G98L2 N210 G98 LO N220 G98L3 N250 G98LO0 N99999 9658221 G71 Area of inclusion Elements A and B are to be left unmachined including the mutually overlapped surface e Aand B must be islands e The first island must start outside the second island N180 G9812 N190 G01 G42 X 10 Y 50 N200 14 35 Y 50 G03 X410 Y 50 N210 G98LO N220 G98L3 N230 G01 G42 X 90 Y 50 N240 1465 J 50 G03 X 90 Y 50 N250 G98L0 N99999 96 S822 1 G71 Fig 8 23 Overlapping islands area of inclusion RR RM C P M H 8 22 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group l Area of exclusion Surface A is to be left unmachined without the portion overlapped by B Amust be an island and B a pocket Bmust lie within A N180 N190 N200 N210 N220 N230 N240 N250 G98 L2 G01 G42 X 10 Y 50 1435 J 50 G03 X 10 Y450 G98 LO G98 L3 G01 G41 X 40 Y 50 1 65 J 50 G03 X 40 Y 50 G98 LO N99999 8221 G71 Area of intersection Only the area overlapped by both A and B is to remain unmachined Aand B must be islands Amust start within B N180 N190 N200 N210 N220 N230 N240 N250 G9812 G01 G42 X460 Y 50 1435 J 50 G03 X 60 Y 50 G98 LO G98 L3 G01 G42 X 90 Y450 65 J 50 G03
47. 59 M3 e RCTL Status display T NB G75 PBi 2 PB2 20 PO3 10 PBF 100 P25 x 80 PBE V 50 Pa 500 132 6878 Z 166 2568 C 90 8800 PROGRRM RUN SINGLE BLOCK AND EDITING ido 12 56090 30 8080 Programming mode M 5 8 Graphics or additional status display TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 introduction 1 1 The TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 TNC Accessories 3D Touch Probe Systems The TNC provides the following features when used in conjunction with a HEIDENHAIN 3D touch probe e Electronic workpiece alignment compensation of workpiece misalignment Datum setting Measurement of the workpiece during i program run i e Digitizing 3D surfaces optional The TS 120 transmits its signals over cable while i the TS 510 uses infrared light Fig 1 6 HEIDENHAIN 3D Touch Probe Systems TS 511 and TS 120 Floppy Disk Unit The HEIDENHAIN FE 401 floppy disk unit enables you to store programs and tables on diskette It is aiso a means of transferring programs created on a PC Very large programs that exceed the storage capacity of the TNC can be drip fed the machine executes each transferred block and erases it immediately freeing up memory for the next block from the FE Fig 1 7 HEIDENHAIN FE 401 Floppy Disk Unit Electronic Handwhee Electronic handwheels facilitate precise manual control of the axis slides Similar to a conv
48. Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group I SL cycles are highly efficient cycies that allow machining of any contour These cycles have the following characteristics A contour can be composed of severai overlapping subcontours Islands or pockets can form a subcontour The subcontours are defined in subprograms The control automatically superimposes the subcontours and calculates the points of intersection formed by overlapping The term SL is derived from the characteristic Subcontour List of cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Since this is purely a geometry cycle no cutting data or feed values are defined The machining data are specified in the following cycles PILOT DRILLING G56 ROUGH OUT G57 CONTOUR MILLING G58 G59 The SL cycles of group II offer further contour oriented machining processes and are described later Each subprogram defines whether G41 or G42 radius compensation applies The sequence of points determines the direction of rotation in which the contour is machined The control infers from these data whether the specific subprogram describes a pocket or an island The control recognizes a pocket if the tool path lies inside the contour The control recognizes an island if the tool path lies outside the contour For easier familiarization the following examples begin with only the rough out cycle and then proceed progressively to the full range of functions provided by this group of cycles Progr
49. L1 0 a t Loss dee tebacacoe eterne eoa lea Cail bolt hole circle 1 Load data for boit hole circie 2 only re enter changed data N150 DOO Q1 POT 90 1 New circle center X coordinate N160 DOO O2 POT 625 encre aisida tesy New circle center Y coordinate N170 DOO OS POI 5 cccsscsetscccsossseccenssconsescesseseceaaes New number of holes N180 DOO O4 PO1 435 oo eremi New bolt circle radius N190 DOO O6 POI 30 Lieserer New hole angle increment not full circle 5 holes 30 apart N200 L1 0 seeenenteenmeeeieceeesssu dll boit hole circle 2 N210 GOO G40 G90 24200 N2 Continued on next page Lee aaa M e TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 23 7 Programming with Q Parameters AR EI a U 7 9 Programming Examples N220 G98 L1 sees SUDprogram bolt hole circle N230 DOO Q10 PO1 40 oes Set the counter for finished holes N240 D10 P01 Q6 P07 QP03 10 If the hole angle increment has been entered jump to LBL 10 N250 DO4 Q6 P01 360 P02 03 wo Calculate the hole angle increment distribute holes over 360 N260 G98 L10 N270 D01 Q11 P01 05 PO2 06 oo eee Calculate second hole position from the start angle and hole angle increment N280 G90 1 01 J Q2 GOO G40 sess Set pole at bolt circle center N290 G10 R O4 H O5 M3 aaisan Move in the plane to first hole N300 GOO Z O7 M99 susssssssssseesss MOVE in Z to setup clearance call cycle N310 D01 Q10 PO1 O10 PO2 1 sues Count complete
50. Operation and Setup 2 4 3D Touch Probes Calibrating the 3D touch probe The touch probe must be calibrated in the following cases for commissioning after stylus breakage when the stylus is changed when the probing feed rate is changed in the case of irregularities such as those resulting from warming of the machine During calibration the TNC finds the effective length of the stylus and the effective radius of the ball tip To calibrate the touch probe clamp a ring gauge of known height and known inside radius to the machine table To calibrate the effective length Fig 2 9 Calibrating the touch probe length Set the datum in the tool axis such that for the machine tool table Z 0 Select the calibration function for the touch probe length If necessary enter the tool axis Move the highlight to DATUM Enter the height of the ring gauge here 5 mm If necessary change the displayed traverse direction The touch probe contacts the upper surface of the ring gauge i e pT 2 10 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 4 3D Touch Probes To calibrate the effective radius Position the ball tip in the bore hole of the ring gauge Compensating center misalignment After the touch probe is inserted it normally needs to be exactly aligned with the spindle axis The misalignment is measured with this calibration function and automatically compensated electronically
51. Program Run 7 19 7 9 Programming Examples r E 7 21 Rectangular pocket with island corner rounding and tangential approach 7 21 Bolt hole circle 22 dec testet eei duet toe et etie tese bes edees Dec deter aca 7 23 EDS eeen eee TEE 7 25 Hemisphere machined with end mill lees ceret rta eene 7 27 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 1 General Overview T EE A ENEA 8 2 Programming a CYCLE x iacere io Edo tea De ada so Cbr ES Dimensions in the tool axis seeeessssssses ceste rehenes menit s seti rater sta Deep Dil 83 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles c ccccsecsescesescenscccescessessensescrececcsssenscssoesesasazes 8 4 PECKING GB39 1 eret eee dila titer otielitesdele ee bte eatin 84 TAPPING with floating tap holder G84 PEET AEE ec aec T deiuinr OHO RIGID TAPPING G85 P EEEE E E A HiesesPuxtee tee eetu lo rosas vivs ioebvee s e teer eese e aa THREAD CUTTING G86 ETAT A 8 8 SLOT MILLING G74 eeseeses esent ERROREM 8 9 POCKET MILLING G75 G76 E T EE E ETATE E HIT Om Ul CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING G77 G78 vn 8 13 8 3 SL Cycles Group ccosssessessssconescscnscersensssenscacencasencnssccscancnes 8 15 CONTOUR GEOMETRY G37 cece cececcecseesccecesccasceccesccacsececerecesesseersanacarerseeeens 8 16 ROUGHB QUI G J a ene ieeireetoie ce Race Ere Rc
52. SURFACE COORDINATES Q5 Absolute coordinates of the workpiece surface referenced to the workpiece datum CLEARANCE HEIGHT Q7 Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece Position for tool retraction at the end of the cycle PECKING DEPTH Q10 Dimension by which the tool is plunged for each infeed FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q11 Traversing speed of the tool in the tool plane e FEED RATE FOR MILLING Q12 Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane CLIMB OR UP CUT Q15 Climb milling input value 1 Up cut milling input value 1 To enable climb milling and conventional up cut milling alternately in several infeeds input value 0 eco TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 MTM M MM yi bel from cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY iif be 8 35 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group 1I Example Input parameters in cycle G125 Milling depth Q1 Allowance for side Q3 Top surface of workpiece Q5 Clearance height O7 Pecking depth Q10 Feed rate for pecking Q11 Feed rate for milling Q12 Milling type Q15 climb milling 10 2 mm 100 mm min 200 mm min 1 Cycle in part program 9688371 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N40 T1 G17 1500 sess N50 G37 P01 1 N90 GOO G40 Z 100 M2 N100 G98 LT onanan inisle N110 G01 G41 X 0 Y 15 N120 X 5 Y 20 N130 G06 X 5 Y 75 N140 G01 Y 95 N150 G25 R7 5 N160 GO1
53. X 90 Y 50 G98 LO N99999 58221 G71 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 Fig 8 24 Overlapping islands area of exclusion Fig 8 25 Overlapping islands area of intersection 8 23 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group I Example Overlapping pockets and islands PGM 824 is similar to PGM 820 but adds the islands C and D Tool Center cut end mili ISO 1641 radius 3 mm The contour is composed of the following elements Two overlapping pockets A and B and two islands within the pockets C and D Cycle in a part program 9688241 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 2 20 N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 3 N40 T1 G17 2500 N50 G37 P01 1 P02 2 P03 3 P04 4 N60 G57 P01 2 P02 10 POS 5 P04 100 P05 2 P06 0 P07 500 N70 G00 G40 G90 Z 100 MO6 N80 X 50 Y 50 MOS N90 Z2 M99 N100 Z 100 M02 N110 G98 L1 N120 G01 G41 X 10 Y 50 N130 1 35 J 50 G03 X 10 Y 50 N140 G98 LO N150 G98 L2 N160 G01 G41 X 90 Y 50 N170 1 65 J 50 G03 X 90 Y 50 N180 G98 LO N190 G98 L3 N200 G01 G41 X 27 Y 42 N210 Y 58 N220 X 43 N230 42 N240 X 27 N250 G98 LO N260 G98 L4 N270 G01 G42 X 57 Y 42 N280 X 73 N290 X 65 Y 58 N300 X 57 Y 42 N310 G98 LO N99999 9658241 G71 a H 8 24 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Fig 8 26 Milling of outline Fig 8 27 PILOT DRILLING G56 This cycle performs pilot dri
54. Y axis Terminate the probing function TOUCH POINTS OF BASIC ROTATION a LL Ignore the previous touch point coordinates Probe both workpiece sides twice each Enter the coordinates of the datum 2 16 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 5 Setting the Datum with 3D Touch Probe Circle center as datum With this function you can set the datum at the center of bore holes circular pockets cylinders journats circular islands etc PROBING Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING CC cc Inside circle The TNC automatically probes the inside wail in all four coordinate axis directions For incomplete circles circular arcs you can choose the appropriate probing directions Fig 2 16 Probing the inside of a cylindrical surface to find the center Move the touch probe to a position approximately in the center of the circle The probe touches four points on the inside of the circle Enter the second coordinate of the datum for example in the Y axis B Terminate the probing function TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 17 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 5 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe Outside circle Fig 2 17 Probing the outside of a cylindrical surface to find the center Move the touch probe to the starting position near the first touch point 7 outside of the circle X X Y Y i Select the probing d
55. a file of type I Select the copying function DESTINATION FILE Type the new file name into the highlight bar in the screen headline The file type here is Copy the file To erase a file You can erase files in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING operating mode Cali the file directory with CL PGM D A Ma M a EEE PRGE PRGE DELETE SELECT es r 0 0 amp A Move the highlight to the file you wish to delete DELETE Erase the file 8 Protected files A protected file status P cannot be erased If you are sure you wish to erase such a file you must first remove the protection see page 1 32 TNC 425 1NC 415 B TNC 407 1 31 4 Introduction 1 5 Files Protecting renaming and converting files in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING operating mode you can convert files from one type to another e rename files g protect files against editing and erasure PROTECT UNPROTECT RENAME CONVERT T7 Deje e To protect a file Move the highlight to the file that you wish to protect PROTECT Seiect PROTECT The file now has status P and cannot be B i accidentally changed or erased The protected file is displayed in bright characters To cancel file protection Move the highlight to the file with status P whose protection you wish to remove Select UNPROTECT Type the code number 86357 into the highlight bar in the
56. accordance with his requirements Some examples of user parameters are Dialog language Interface behavior Traversing speeds Sequence of machining e Effect of overrides Input possibilities for machine parameters Machine parameters can be programmed as Decimal numbers Enter only the number Pure binary numbers Enter a percent sign 96 before the number Hexadecimal numbers Enter a dollar sign before the number Example Instead of the decimal number 27 you can enter the binary number 11011 or the hexadecimal number 1B The individual machine parameters can be entered in the different number systems Selecting general user parameters General users parameters are selected with code number 123 in the MOD functions dh The MOD functions also incliide maci ine e e M 11 2 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams eS 11 1 General User Parameters Parameters for external data transfer Integrating TNC interfaces EXT1 5020 0 and EXT2 5020 1 to an external device data format and transmission stop Input value O to 255 The input value is the sum of the individual values in the Value column MP 5020 Function Cases Number of data bits 7 data bits ASCII code 8th bit parity 8 data bits ASCH code 9th bit parity Block Check Character BCC Any BCC cian asettinudaatei acta gp a ries Sik BCC control character not permitted
57. can adjust the feed rate with the override knob on the TNC keyboard see page 2 5 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 l 4 21 4 Programming 4 5 Entering Tool Related Data Spindle speed S The spindle speed S is entered in revolutions per minute rprn Input range S 0 to 99 999 rpm To change the spindle speed S in the part program gt Enter the spindle speed S for example 1000 rpm Resulting NC block T1 G17 S1000 To adjust the spindle speed S during program run On machines with stepless spindle drives the spindle speed S can be varied with the override knob NENNEN a E 4 22 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 6 Entering Miscellaneous Functions and Program Stop The M functions M for miscellaneous affect Program run Machine functions Tool behavior The back cover foldout of this manual contains a list of M functions that are predetermined for the TNC The list indicates whether an M function becomes effective at the start or at the end of the block in which it is programmed An NC block can contain several M functions as long as they are inde pendent of each other Refer to the overview on the last cover page to see how the M functions are grouped Some M functions 2 are not effective on certain machines The machine tool builder n may y also add some of his own M functions A program run or test run will be interrupted when it reaches a block containing G38 If you
58. connect must be programmed circular arc directly before the G06 block Before the G06 block there must be at least two positioning blocks defining the contour element which tangentially connects to the arc Fig 5 34 The path of a tangential arc depends on the preceding contour element at A tangential arc is a two dimensional operation the coordinates in the G06 block and in the positioning block preceding it must be in the plane of the arc To program a circular path G06 with tangential connection g a Circular path with tangential connection Enter the coordinates of the arc end point in incremental dimensions a for example X 50 mm Y 2 10 mm x80 veon B Further entries if necessary Radius compensation Feed rate e Miscellaneous function Resulting NC block G06 G42 G91 X 50 Y 10 524 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Example for exercise Circular arc connecting to a straight line Coordinates of the transition point from the straight line to the arc X 10mm Y 40mm Coordinates of the arc end point X 50mm Y 50mm Milling depth Z 15 mm Too radius R Part program 969b2bl 37 17 rte rete eque N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 2 20 sss N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T12 L 25 R 20 suse N40 T12 G17 S1000 zaionaren N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MO6 sss N60 X30 Y 30 sss
59. contour consisting of many short straight lines is normally machined such that the corners are cut as exactly as possible insert rounding arc between straight lines with M112 E The TNC inserts a rounding arc between two straight lines The size of the arc depends on the machine tool It is calculated by the TNC such that the programmed feed rate override setting 10096 is maintained at the rounded corner If this is not possible the TNC automatically decreases the feed rate You can enter a tolerance value E that defines the maximum permissible deviation from the programmed contour When necessary the TNC will reduce the feed rate in order to maintain the programmed tolerance Duration of effect M112 E is effective during operation with feed precontrol as well as with servo lag Fig 5 50 Permissible deviation from the Cancelling programmed contour To cancel M112 E enter M113 TNC 425 7NC 415 B TNC 407 5 41 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data Automatic compensation of machine geometry when working with tilted axes M114 not TNC 407 Standard behavior without M114 The TNC moves the tool to the positions given in the part program The tool offset resulting from a tilted axis and the machine geometry must be calculated by a postprocessor Automatic compensation of machine geometry with M114 The TNC compensates the tool offset resulting from pos
60. counterclockwise Circular pocket milling clockwise Circular pocket milling counterclockwise Pecking Tapping with floating tap holder Rigid tapping Thread cutting Contour data Pilot drilling in connection with G37 SLII Rough out in connection with G37 SLI Floor finishing in connection with G37 SLII Side finishing in connection with G37 SLII Contour train in connection with G37 Cycles Working plane XY tooi axis Z Working plane ZX tool axis Y Working plane YZ tool axis X Tool axis IV Chamfer with length R Corner rounding with R Tangential contour approach with R Tangential contour departure with R Transfer the last nominal position value as pole Define blank form Blank form definition for graphics MIN point 31 Blank form definition for graphics MAX point ee re Stop program run Tool path compensation No tool radius compensation RO Tool radius compensation left of the contour RL Tool radius compensation right of the contour RR Paraxial compensation lengthening R Paraxial compensation shortening R 51 Next tool number with central too file 55 Probing function Unit of measurement 70 inches at start of program 71 Millimeters at start of program Dimensioning 90 Absolute dimensions 91 Incremental dimensions aaa Pj Set label number ae Tool definition ee EEE ee TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 33 App
61. cuts are as long as possible with few cutting movements e FEED RATE Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane The machine parameters determine whether e the contour is milled first and then surface machined or vice versa e the contour is milled conventionally or by climb cutting all pockets are roughed out first and then contour miiled over all infeeds or whether contour milling and roughing out are performed mutually for each infeed Fig 8 15 Cutter path for roughing out TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 317 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Example Roughing out a rectangular pocket Rectangular pocket with rounded corners Tool center cut end mill SO 1641 radius 5 mm Coordinates of the island corners X Y 70 mm 60 mm 15 mm 60 mm 15 mm 20 mm 70 mm 20 mm Coordinates of the auxiliary pocket X Y 5 mm 5 mm e 105 mm b mm 105 mm 105 mm 5 mm 105 mm Starting point for machining 8 X 40 mm Y 60 mm Setup clearance 2 Miting depth 15 Pecking depth 8 Feed rate for pecking 100 mm min Finishing allowance 0 Rough out angie 0 Milling feed rate 500 mm min ROUGH OUT cycie in a part program POSSIBLE G7 T used teet Start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 sess Define workpiece blank N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 RFI oiiro Define tool N40 T1 G17 S2500 1 Cll tool N50 G37 P01 2 P02 1 eese tene In the CONTOUR GEOMETRY
62. cycle call N100 2 100 M02 N110 G98 L1 N140 G98 LO N150 G98 L2 N180 G98 LO N99999 S820I G71 Subprograms Overlapping pockets Pocket elements A and B overlap The control automatically calculates the points of intersection S and S they do not have to be programmed The pockets are programmed as full circles N110 G98L1 N120 G01 G41 X 10 Y 50 A N130 1435 J 50 G03 X 10 Y 50 Left pocket N140 G98L0 N150 G9812 N160 G01 G41 X 90 Y 50 N170 1465 J 50 G03 X 90 Y 50 B Right pocket N180 G98 LO N99999 8201 G71 Fig 8 17 Points of intersection S and S of Depending on the control setup machine parameters machining starts pockets A and B either with the outline or the surface Fig 8 18 Outline is machined first Fig 8 19 Surface is machined first a a 8 20 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group 1 Area of inclusion Both surfaces A and B are to be machined includ ing the mutually overlapped area Aand B must be pockets The first pocket in cycle G37 must start outside the second pocket N110 N120 N130 N140 N150 N160 N170 N180 G98 L1 G01 G41 X 10 Y 50 1435 J 50 G03 X410 Y 50 G98 LO G98 2 G01 G41 X 90 Y 50 1 65 J 50 G03 X 50 Y 50 G98 LO Area of exclusion Surface A is to be machined without the portion overlapped by B e A must be a pocket and B an island A must start outside of B
63. ee 1 1 The TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 Screen layout of modes Programming mode Machining mode Programming mode is active SECO 73813 G 1 N18 DOG Q1 P i Q e N28 DBO 92 P 1 8 e N30 DQG Q3 POI 2 N35 DGB Q6 POI 40 N36 DQG Q16 POi 10 Nae DOG G P91 90 NSO Daa Qi PO 276 N62 900 Q8 PQI 8 N78 Dae 818 PO1 SD N82 CEG 99 PO 8 N92 DOG 919 PO1 50 e Ni 08 912 PO Mice X 45 5 Y 6 5 N128 DOO Q20 Pei 500 e 6 j A START STOP E2 SINGLE RT START Text of the selected program Graphics or additional status display 0 90 16 45 RESET STRRT Soft key row MANUAL OPERATION and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL modes A machining mode is Programming selected mode MRNURL GPERRTION X 25 3684 Y 250 3600 Z 25 0080 B 331 0000 C 12 5000 a e 3D ROT TOUCH DRTUM Pele lel TET LA mmm Coordinates Selected axis i means TNC in operation Status display e g feed rate F miscellaneous function M symbols for basic rotation and or tilted working plane M 5 8 1 6 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 PROGRAM RUN operating modes A machining mode is active 73805 Gri N10 636 61 X B Y O 2 50 N29 G31 GSO X 100 v 100 2 0 N36 G99 71 L 0 R 7 5 NS T1 G1 1500 N50 GOO 540 GSA 2450 Text of the selected program N 8 X 5Q N
64. figure 179 Dimensions in mm Coordinate Coordinates origin 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Y1 Y2 VVNOQ Vg gg gag Gag g gHgQgggg TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentais of NC Programming tool movements During workpiece machining an axis position is changed either by move ment of the tool or movement of the machine table on which the work piece is fixed at You always program as if the tool moves and the workpiece remains stationary NA EN If the machine table moves the corresponding axes are identified on the machine operating panel with a prime mark e g X Y The programmed direction of such axis movement always corresponds to the direction of tool movement relative to the workpiece but in the opposite direction Fig 1 19 On this machine the tool moves in the Y and Z axes and the table moves in the X axis Position encoders Position encoders convert the movement of the machine axes into electrical signals The control constantly evaluates these signals to calculate the actual position of the machine axes if there is an interruption in power the calculated position will no longer correspond to the actual position When power is restored the TNC can re establish this retationship Fig 1 20 Linear position encoder here for the X axis Reference marks The scales of the position encoders contain one or mo
65. first time As a beginner you should work through this manual completely from beginning to end to ensure that you are capable of fully exploiting the features of this powerful tool If you re aiready familiar with TNC you can use the manual as a comprehensive reference and review guide The table of contents and numerous cross references help you quickly find the topics and information you need Easy to read dialog flowcharts show you how to enter data for the desired function A description of the function of each key is provided in a box to the right of the key If the user already knows the keys he can concentrate on the illustrated input overview at the left of the flowchart The TNC dialog messages are shown shaded in the flowcharts TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Dialog flowcharts Dialog initiation G a3 b DIALOG PROMPT ON THE TNC SCREEN ae B B Here the manual explains the functions of the keys Answer the prompt with these keys NEXT DIALOG PROMPT f B i Function of the key Piessthie ke A dashed line indicates that Y you can press either the key s Function of the alternative key above the line or beiow it Or press this key The trail of points means that only part of the dialog is shown or e the dialog continues on the next page TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Contents User s Manual TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 243 030 xx 259 930 xx 259 040 xx Introduction ISO Programming anual O
66. for movement in the negative direction of the tool axis to a given percentage of the last programmed feed rate Fmax Faroe Fe Fmax Maximum feed rate in negative tool axis direction Foe Last programmed feed rate B Programmed factor behind M103 in 96 Cancelling M103 F is canceled by entering M103 without a factor Example Feed rate for plunging is to be 2096 of the feed rate in the plane Actual contouring feed rate mm min with override 100 G01 G41 X 20 Y 20 F500 M103 F20 500 Y 50 500 G91 Z 2 5 100 Y 5 2 5 367 X 50 500 G90 Z 5 500 i A OO TQ EQ DEPENDET ED 5 40 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data Feed rate at circular arcs M109 M110 M111 Standard behavior M111 The programmed feed rate refers to the center of the tool path Constant contouring speed at circular arcs feed rate increase and decrease M109 The TNC reduces the feed rate for circular arcs at inside contours such that the feed rate at the tool cutting edge remains constant At outside contours the feed rate for circular arcs is correspondingly increased Constant contouring speed at circular arcs feed rate decrease only M110 The TNC reduces the feed rete for circular arcs only at inside contours At outside contours the feed rate remains the same Insert rounding arc between straight lines M112 E Standard behavior without M112 E A
67. imm Spindle speed S 500rpm Feed rate from diagram F 50 mm min Number of tool teeth n 6 Feed rate to enter F 300 mm min d imm Spindle speed z S rpm 11 22 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 4 Diagrams for Machining Feed rate for tapping F The feed rate for tapping Fis calculated from the thread pitch p and the spindle speed S F 2pS Units F in mm min p in mmyi S in 1 mm The feed rate for tapping can be read directly from the diagram below Example Thread pitch p 1 mm rev Spindle speed S 100rpm Feed rate for tapping F 100mm min Thread pitch p imm rev Spindle speed S irpm a aM ii1tLtLL1 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 23 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 5 Features Specifications and Accessories 11 24 Description Contouring control for machines with up to five axes Features digital speed control and oriented spindie stop Components Logic unit keyboard color VDU with soft keys Data interfaces RS 232 C V 24 RS 422 V 11 Expanded data interface with LSV 2 protocol for remote operation of the TNC through the data interface with HEIDENHAIN software TNC REMOTE Simultaneous axis control for contour elements Straight lines up to 5 axes TNC 407 3 axes export versions TNC 415 F and TNC 425 E 4 axes Circles up to 3 axes with tilted working plane Helices 3 axes Background programming One
68. in relation to the pole You could think of polar coordinates as the result of a measurement using a scale whose zero point is fixed at the datum and which you can rotate to different angles in the plane around the pole Fig 1 12 Identifying positions on a circular arc with polar coordinates The positions in this plane are defined by the Polar Radius R the distance from the circle center J to the position and the Polar Angle H the size of the angle between the reference axis and the scale TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 11 1 introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Setting the pole The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates These coordinates also determine the reference axis for the polar angie H Coordinates of the poie Reference axis of the angle X Y Z Fig 1 13 Polar coordinates and their associated reference axes Datum setting The workpiece drawing identifies a certain point on the workpiece usually a corner as the absolute datum and perhaps one or more other points as relative datums Tne datum setting procedure establishes these points as the origin of the absolute or relative coordinate systems The work piece which is aligned with the machine axes is moved to a certain position relative to the tool and the display is set either to zero or to another appropriate value e g to compensate the tool radius Fig 1 14 The workpiece datum represents the orig
69. key PROBING POS Ld POS Move the touch probe to a position near the second touch point 2 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 21 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 6 Measuring with a 3D Touch Probe X Y Y Z Select the probe direction with the cursor keys same axis as for 1 Probe the workpiece The value displayed as DATUM is the distance between the two points To return to the datum that was active before the length measurement PROBING Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING POS L3 POS Probe the first touch point again Set the DATUM to the value that you wrote down previously Measuring angles 2 22 You can aiso use the touch probe to measure angles in the working plane You can measure e the angle between the angie reference axis and a workpiece side or the angle between two sides The measured angle is displayed as a value of maximum 90 To find the angle between the angle reference axis and a side of the workpiece PROBING KR ROT ROTATION ANGLE Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING ROT If you will need the current basic rotation later write down the veiue that appears under ROTATION ANGLE Make a basic rotation with the side of the workpiece see section Compensating workpiece misalignment TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manua Operation and Setup 2 6 Measuring with a 3D Touch Probe PROB ING D
70. of collision a aea 5 4 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 2 Contour Approach and Departure End point Similar requirements hold for the end point Can be approached without collision Near the last contour point e Avoids tool damage The ideal location for the end point is again in the extension of the too path outside of the shaded area It is approached without radius compensation Fig 5 6 End point for machining Departure from an end point in the spindle axis The spindie axis is moved separately Example G00 G40 X Y Approach end point Z450 Retract tool f EN see lt A fxlI Ah SR Z PON VOS Fig 5 7 Retract spindle axis separately Common starting and end point Outside of the shaded areas in the illustrations it is possible to define a single point as both the starting and end point GB The ideal location for the starting and end point is exactly between the extensions of the tool paths for machining the first and last contour elements A common starting and end point is approached without radius compensation Fig 5 8 Common starting and end point TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 5 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 2 Contour Approach and Departure Tangential approach and departure The tool approaches the contour on a tangential arc with G26 and departs it with G27 This prevents dwell marks Starting point and end poi
71. parameter TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 7 Address Letters ISO G functions Positioning Straight line interpolation Cartesian coordinates rapid traverse Straight line interpolation Cartesian coordinates Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates clockwise Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates counterclockwise Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates no direction of rotation given Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates tangential contour transition Paraxiai positioning block Straight line interpolation polar coordinates rapid traverse Straight line interpolation polar coordinates Circular interpolation polar coordinates clockwise Circular interpolation polar coordinates counterclockwise Circular interpolation polar coordinates no direction of rotation given Circular interpolation polar coordinates tangential contour transition Dwell time Mirror image Oriented spindle stop Definition of the contour geometry Program call cycle call with G79 Datum shift in datum table Datum shift in program Pilot drilling in connection with G37 SL Rough out in connection with G37 SLI Contour milling clockwise in connection with G37 SLI Contour milling counterclockwise in connection with G37 SLI Scaling factor Rotation of the coordinate system Slot milling Rectangular pocket milling clockwise Rectangular pocket milling
72. part program can be edited while the TNC runs another program TNC 407 without graphics Graphics interactive programming graphics Test run graphics Simultaneous program run graphics not with TNC 407 File types HEIDENHAIN conversationai and ISO programming Tool tables datum tables pallet files Text and system files Program memory Battery buffered for up to 100 files e Capacity 256K bytes TNC 407 128K bytes Tool definitions Up to 254 tools in the program or in tables Look Ahead Defined rounding of discontinuous contour transitions such as for 3D surfaces e Collision prevention with the SL cycle for open contours e Geometry pre calculation for feed rate adaptation TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 5 Features Specifications and Accessories Programmable functions Contour elements Straight line chamfer circular arc circle center circle radius tangentially connecting circular arc corner rounding straight lines and circular arcs for approaching and departing contours Free contour programming For all contour elements not dimensioned for conventional NC programming Three dimensional radius compensation not TNC 407 For changing tool data without having to recalculate the part program Program jumps Subprograms program section repeats main program as subprogram Fixed cycles Peck drilling tapping also with synchronized spindle
73. radius Milling depth Part program 9685231 G71 uen ee cie N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y O 2 20 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 25 N40 T1 G17 780 N50 G00 G40 G90 Z 100 M06 N60 X 25 Y 30 TD N70 2 18 MOS N80 G01 G42 X 0 Y 0 F100 N90 G02 X 100 Y 0 R 50 N100 G00 G40 X 70 Y 30 N110 Z 100 M02 oo ceescstsecseestcecenteeeesennecsrenetences N99999 96S523l G71 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Begin the program Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract and insert tool Pre position in the working plane Move tool to working depth Approach the contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate Mill arc to end point X 100mm Y 0 radius 50mm direction of rotation negative Depart the contour cancel radius compensation Retract in the infeed axis 5 23 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates G06 Circular path with tangential connection The tool moves on an arc that starts at a tangent with the previously programmed contour element A transition between two contour elements is tangential when there is no kink or corner at the intersection between the two contours the transition is smooth Input Coordinates of the end point of the arc Prerequisites The contour element to which the arc with G06 Fig 5 33 The straight line Q is connected tangentially to the is to tangentially
74. sesenta 4 15 Tool radius comnperisellOD utc eet eet Ce eu eru Machining C Tners iniecit ntes bases enn eia en ine dera Sia a rra nene aeo sed cniviceztesuaeceastaause Program Initiation eene reete ener nnne ener de 18 Defining the blank TOI sccccsscicessstesesesncecetbteceseccertacentesdscezesaseneierencecdueyoaresboans terae Ee 4 18 To create a new part program sssssssssesessssenee e eiaeiiai enhn n hene tnnt rhe nennen nnne 4 19 Entering Tool Related Data eese 4 21 Feed rete Posso theca odes tide der eet RO UR Debe beste DERE eee eR TED ase Sa seach 4 21 Spindle Speed S is uentis erp eoe RE E nEn cose etna aieo Ned ees 4 22 Entering Miscellaneous Functions and Program Stop 4 23 Actual Position Capture o ceeeeeeeceee eese eene nente nnne d 24 Marking Blocks for Optional Block Skip 4 25 Text Files EE 4 26 Finding text sections ssssssssssenenneee eee hihi set ed Erasing and inserting characters words and lines sese 4 29 Editing ror dle ood S RARE 4 30 Creating Pallet Files ssccscessssserccnsceotesssessceneesatseenesseerses 4 32 Adding Comments to the Program eere d 34 4 Programming 4 Programming In the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation see page 1 25 you can cre
75. the beginning of the program Go to the end of the program TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 3 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 2 Program Run In the PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE mode of operation the TNC executes a part program continuously to its end or up to a program stop in the PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK mode of operation you must start each block separately by pressing the machine START BUTTON The following functions can be used during a program run interrupt program run Start program run from a certain block Blockwise transfer of very long programs from external storage Block skip Editing and using the too table TOOL T Checking changing Q parameters Graphic simulation Additional status display To run a part program Clamp the workpiece to the machine table Set the datum Select the necessary tables and pallet files gt PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK or PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE Select the part program and the necessary tables and pallet files in the file directory O Go to the first block of the program Run the part program Only in mode Run each biock of the part program separately PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK for each block Feed rate and Spindle speed can be changed with the override knobs You can superimpose handwheel positioning onto programmed axis movements during program run see page 5 43 i aaas 3 4 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test
76. this cycle Example Cutting an inner thread using a threading tool The thread diameter depends on the too used Input data e DEPTH Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread PITCH Thread pitch C ME WETg MM NNNM T d NN M NM ME cc C P 88 i TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles SLOT MILLING G74 Process Roughing process The tooi penetrates the workpiece from the starting position offset by the oversize then mils in the longitudinal direction of the slot The oversize is calculated as slit width tool diameter 2 After downfeed at the end of the slot milling is performed in the opposite direction This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached Finishing process The contro advances the tool at the bottom of Fig 8 4 SLOT MILLING cycie the slot on a tangential arc to the outside contour The tool subsequently climb milis the contour with M3 e Atthe end of the cycle the tool is retracted in rapid traverse to the setup clearance if the number of infeeds was odd the tool returns to the starting position at the level of the setup clearance in the main plane Required tool This cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 The cutter diameter must be smaller than the slot width and larger than half the siot width The siot must be parallel to an axis of the current coordinate system inp
77. to block 1 and end of program A S TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 9 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 4 Nesting Example for exercise Three groups of four holes see page 6 4 with three different tools Machining sequence Countersinking Drilling Tapping Coordinates of the first hole in each group ex 15mm Y 10mm X 45mm Y 60mm X 7mm Y 10mm Hole spacing iX 20mm IY 20mm Hole deta Countersinking Z 3mm 7mm Drilling ZD 15mm 5mm Tapping ZT 10mm 6mm Part program S610I G71 eere nennen Start program N10 G30 G17 X40 Y 0 2 20 uc c MENS Define bank form N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 240 N30 G99 T25 L0 R 2 5 sesenta Toot definition for pecking N40 G99 T30 L 0 R43 sess Tool definition for countersinking N50 G99 T35 LEO R 3 5 sees Tool definition for tapping N60 T35 G17 S3000 ss essent Tool call for countersinking N70 G83 P01 2 P02 3 P03 3 P04 0 P05 100 Leeseteattestesstee etnies OyCle definition pecking N80 L1 0 UMEN seve ernse ettet aeneo teeteaeci cisci Call Subprogram 1 N96 T25 G17 S2500 i seeded Tool call for pecking N100 G83 P01 2 P02 25 PO3 10 P04 0 POS Ea ET EAEE N terc e E eere treten mute anas Cycle definition pecking N110 L1 0 sescscaceeeesteeetateetesteessstresetterereeees CAI subprogram 1 N120 T30 G17 100 chore eee LOO Call for tapping N130 G84 P01 2 P02 15 POS 0 1P04 100 xr Cycle definit
78. tool table Enter a new file name and create a new table TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 49 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Tool data in tables The following information can be entered in tool tables Tool radius and tool length R L Curvature radius of the tool point for three dimensional tool compensation R2 For graphic display of machining with a spherical cutter enter R2 R Oversizes delta values for too radii and tool lengths DR DR2 DL Tool name NAME Maximum and current tool life TIME1 TIME2 CUR TIME Number of a replacement tool RT Too lock TL Tool comment DOC A general user parameter MP7266 defines which data can be entered in the tool table and in what sequence the data is displayed The sequence of information in the tool table shown in the illustrations to the right is only one example out of many possibilities if all the information in a table no longer fits on one screen this is indicated with gt gt or lt lt in the line with the table name To read out or read in a tool table PROSREM RUN JEDIT TOOL TABLE EM EFE RRDIUS e 239475 e 8 125 1 2 8 5 E 3 E o 0 a E 4 2 2 a 2 B S GUTTERIA 7 8 CN 0 155 8 26 8 15 6 bad 8 a E BILLS 1 25 5 40 5 8 1 8 8 Q 8 310 e 3 2 05 E CUTTERIZ 96 125 Fig 4 4 Left part of the too table FIRST TOOL CLO TOOL e
79. with M98 Program structure Move to contour point 10 Machine contour point 11 N30 X ueste etmee nennen nne MOVE to contour point 12 e M 5 38 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Too Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 Standard setting Coordinates are referenced to the workpiece datum see page 1 12 Scale reference point The position feedback scales are provided with one or more reference marks Reference marks define the position of the scale reference point If the scale has only one reference mark its position is the scale reference point if the scale has several distance coded reference marks then the scale reference point is the position of the leftmost reference mark at the beginning of the measuring range Machine datum miscellaneous function M91 The machine datum is required for the following tasks Defining the limits of traverse software limit Switches Moving to machine referenced positions such as tool change positions Setting the workpiece datum The distance for each axis from the scale reference point to the machine datum is defined by the machine manufacturer in a machine parameter If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be referenced to the machine datum end the block with M91 Fig 5 48 Scale reference point 9 and machine datum on i scales with
80. 0 000 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 5 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 Genera User Parameters Parameters for TNC displays and the editor Programming station MP 7210 Function TNC with Machine cS 0 e TNC as programming station with active PLC oo eccscssssesseceneesensenstsestenssseesecasssonesseeesesssanecersesnenesseatereees 1 TNC as programming station with inactive PLC ooo ceececssceeceeeeseseesccaceeseceeensessseaeeeceessettrseeseasecaenseees Automatic acknowledgment of POWER INTERRUPTED message MP 7212 Function e Acknowledge power interruption with key e Power interruption automatically acknowledged Block number increment for ISO programming MP 7220 Function Value Block number increment 0 to 150 Length of file names MP 7222 Function File names with maximum 8 characters File names with maximum 12 characters e File names with maximum 16 characters i A 116 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams _ Inhibiting file management for particular file types Input value 0 to 63 sum of the individual values in the Value column If you do not wish to inhibit file management for a particular file type use the value 0 h MP 7224 0 Inhibit file management for e HEIDENHAIN programs alie eh idee b e e cet ee ade ee EEUU UNE REN e SO programs Tool tables e MEZ 5 c0 c D
81. 0 015 ROUGH E 8 01 L E 8 9815 L E E 0 02 FINE USRKS BEGIN NEXT TRBLE car LINE Fig 4 5 Right part of the tool table Select external data input output directly from the table TRRNSFER Read out the table FN Ei TRANSFER Read in the table only possible if EDIT ON is selected eje Ex See aiso page 9 2 L 4 10 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 8 4 2 Tools Fig 4 6 DL DR DR2 TL RT TIME1 TIME2 CUR TIME DOC Number by which the tool is called in the program Number by which the too is called in the program TOOL NAME only for conversational programming Value for tool length compensation TOOL LENGTH L TOOL RADIUS R TOOL RADIUS 2 Tool radius R Tool radius R2 for toroid cutter TOOL LENGTH OVERSIZE TOOL RADIUS OVERSIZE TOOL RADIUS OVERSIZE 2 Delta value for too length Detta value for tool radius R Deita value for too radius R2 oniy for conversational programming TOOL INHIBITED YES ENT NO NOENT ALTERNATE TOOL Tooi Lock Number of a Replacement Tool if available see aiso TIME2 Maximum tool life in minutes MAXIMUM TOOL LIFE The meaning of this information can vary depending on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provi
82. 0 G31 G90 X 110 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R45 ues N40 T1 G17 S2000 N50 G76 P01 2 P02 10 POS 4 PO4 80 POS X 80 POG Y 40 PO7 100 avis N60 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 N70 X 60 Y 35 MOS sess N80 Z 2 M99 eise cene te eee enters N90 Z 100 M02 EHE d TIET N99999 9658121 G71 Define POCKET MILLING cycle 1 Retract in the infeed axis insert tool Retract in the infeed axis end of program Start of program Define workpiece biank Define tool Call tool Approach the starting position center of pocket spindle ON Pre position in Z to setup clearance cycle call TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING G77 G78 Process Circular pocket milling is a roughing cycle in which the tool penetrates the workpiece from the starting position pocket center The cutter subsequently follows a spiral path shown in figure 8 10 at the programmed feed rate The stepover factor is determined by the value k see G75 G76 POCKET MILLING Caiculations The process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted to the starting position Required tool The cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling at the pocket center Fig 8 10 Cutter path for roughing out Direction of rotation for roughing out Clockwise G77 Counterclockwise G
83. 0 M02 N130 G98 L1 Same as subprogram on page 8 40 N250 G98 LO N99999 S846l G71 The corresponding subprogram see page 8 41 is programmed after M2 SCALING FACTOR G72 Application G72 allows contours to be enlarged or reduced in size within a program enabling you to program shrinkage and oversize allowances Activation The scaling factor becomes effective immediately upon definition The scaling factor can be applied e in the machining plane or on all three main axes at the same time depending on MP 7410 e to the dimensions in cycles to the parallel axes U V VV input data The cycle is defined by entering the factor F The control then multiplies the coordinates and radii by F as described under Activation above Enlargement F gt 1 up to 99 999 999 Reduction F 1 down to 0 000 001 Cancellation Cancel the scaling factor by entering a scaling factor of 1 in the SCALING FACTOR cycle Prerequisite It is advisable to set the datum to an edge or a corner of the contour before enlarging or reducing the contour a TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 45 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations Example Scaling factor A contour subprogram 1 is to be executed as originally programmed at the manually set datum X 0 Y 0 and then referenced to position X 60 Y 70 and executed with a scaling factor of 0 8 SCALING FACT OR cycle in a part program 9688471 G71 isses Start OF program
84. 0 TI G17 S9500 f aeea aee ea Eat N50 G83 P01 2 P02 10 P03 5 P04 0 POS 100 eas N60 GOO G40 G90 24100 M06 See ae ie N70 X 15 Y 10 EN N100 X 45 Y 60 Bo uut Mer E EE NT30 ET 0 ssec E e DSi edes N120 X75 Y N Loose AEE E N140 Z 100 M02 N150 G98 L1 une an sete Lee Gr EI unes N160 G79 Mu tinis e MET cess N170 G91 X 20 M99 N180 Y 20 M99 givasasthhe Dur E diee teats N190 X 20 G90 Mage ecu E RE N200 G98 LO Lese deste y seat edego vase eda ene ae En ERU OUR N99999 96S641G71 AEE E inen rese aca cias Start program Define biank form Define the tool Cail the tool Cycle definition PECKING see page 8 5 Retract and insert tool Move to group 1 Pre position in the infeed axis Call subprogram subprogram executed with block N90 Move to group 2 Call subprogram Move to group 3 Call subprogram Retract in the infeed axis end of main program M2 the subprogram is entered behind M2 Beginning of subprogram Perform pecking cycle for first hole Move to second hole incremental and drill Move to third hole incremental and drill Move to fourth hole incremental and drill change to absolute coordinates G90 End of subprogram End of program TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 v 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 2 Program Section Repeats Like subpro
85. 1 Y COOfdinate for center of ellipse N30 D00 Q3 P01 50 Semiaxis in X N40 DOO Q4 POI 20 oo ceeeeeeecescnsseresseereenes SOMUAXIS IN Y N50 DOO O5 P01 0 Starting angle N60 DOO Q6 P01 360 End angle N70 DOO Q7 PO1 40 oo eeeeceecsssseestesteeseeeeees Number of calculation steps N80 DOO Q8 PO1 40 sees ROTationa position N90 DOO Q9 P01 10 Depth N100 DOO Q10 PO1 100 Plunging feed rate N110 DOO Q11 PO1 350 uus Milling feed rate N120 DOO Q12 P01 2 Setup clearance in Z N130 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 2 20 N140 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N150 G99 T1 L 0 R 2 5 N160 T1 G17 N170 GOO G40 G90 Z 200 N180 L10 0 Execute subprogram ellipse N190 GOO Z 200 M2 Continued on next page TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 25 7 Programming with Q Parameters ns 7 9 Programming Examples N200 G98 L10 N210 G54 X Q1 Y4Q2 essere Shift datum to center of ellipse N220 G73 G90 H O8 Liisassa s Activate rotation if Q8 is loaded N230 O35 Q6 Q5YQ7 iire Calculate angle increment end angle to starting angle divided by the number of steps N240 Q38 Q5 eara a aE ain netten tas Set current angle for calculation starting angle IN250 O37 0 use irte iere ied Set counter for milled steps N260 Q21 Q3 COS O36 emm meis calculate X coordinate for starting point N270 Q22 Q4 SIN O36 eee Calculate Y coordinate for starting point N280 G00 G40 G90 X 021 Y Q22 M3 LOC OM Move to starting poin
86. 2224 Position display in the tilted system ssesssssssesessssseseeree tenen sene nene enn nnn 2 25 Limitations on working with the tilting function esessseeseeeeeeeenn 2 25 Activating mariual tiltilg 3 ern eia or Shri a ar aoea a aAA NS 2 26 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 1 Moving the Machine Axes Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons V gt manuak open TION The axis moves as long as the corresponding axis direction button is held down You can move more than one axis at once in this way For continuous movement j MANUAL OPERATION Press and hold the machine axis direction button then press the e g T machine START button The axis continues to move after you release the keys together To stop the axis press the machine STOP button You can only move one axis at a time with this method pe ban e a o a M MR Q Rm RR RR RR RR ml 2 2 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 1 Moving the Machine Axes Traversing with an electronic handwheel p mucmowcmawpwHEEL INTERPOLATION FACTOR _ Enter the interpolation factor see table Select the axis that you wish to move For portable handwheels make the selection at the handwheel for integral handwheels at the TNC keyboard Now move the selected axis with the electronic handwheel If you are using the portable handwheel first press the en
87. 50 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables G53 Application Datum tables are applied for frequently repeating machining sequences at various locations on the workpiece A frequent use of the same datum shift The datum points from datum tabies are only effective with absolute coordinate values Within a program datum points can either be programmed directly in the cycle definition or called from a datum table Input Enter the number of the datum from the datum table or a Q parameter number If you enter a Q parameter number the TNC activates the datum number found in the O parameter Cancellation Cail a datum shift to the coordinates X 0 Y 0 etc from a datum table Execute the datum shift directly via cycle definition see also page 8 38 Fig 8 45 Fig 8 46 Similar datum shifts Oniy absolute datum shifts are possible from a datum table TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations Editing a datum table Datum tables are edited in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode gt d SHOL Show the datum tabie TYPE SELECT Select the desired file TX A B Enter new file name such as TAB D E m Edit the datum table The soft keys comprise the following functions for editing f ERREUR RU REPRE EEUU rra BEGIN END PARE FREE INSERT DELETE NEXT TABLE TABLE ij i LiNE LINE LINE em 0 om
88. 78 input data e SETUP CLEARANCE S e MILLING DEPTH B pocket DEPTH The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative sign means negative working direction PECKING DEPTH e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Traversing speed of the tool during penetration CIRCLE RADIUS B Radius of the circular pocket e FEED RATE Fig 8 11 Distances and infeeds for Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING Fig 8 12 Direction of the cutter path TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 13 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles Example Milling a circular pocket Pocket center coordinates X 60mm Y 50mm Setup clearance Milling depth Pecking depth mm Feed rate for pecking mm min Circle radius mm Milling feed rate mm min Direction of the cutter path CIRCULAR POCKET cycle in a part program 96S814I G71 Start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 2 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 G90 X100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 4 Define tool N40 T1 G17 2000 Call too N50 G77 P01 2 P02 12 P03 6 P04 80 P05 35 PO6 100 Define circular pocket milling cycle N60 G00 G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Retract in the infeed axis insert tool N70 X 60 Y 50 MOS Approach the starting position center of pocket spindle ON N80 Z 2 M99 Pre position in Z to setup clearance cycle call N90 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis end of program N99999 9658141 G71 8 14 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8
89. 9 T11 L0 R45 N40 T11 G17 S2500 N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MOS N60 X 50 Y 30 N80 2 12 MO3 N90 G11 G41 R 32 H 180 F100 N100 G13 G91 H 3240 Z 13 5 F200 N110 GOO G40 G90 X 50 Y 30 N120 Z 100 MO2 N99999 S536I G71 Begin the program Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract and insert tool Pre position in the working plane to the center of the hole Transfer position as pole Move tool to starting depth Approach contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate Helical interpolation angie and movement in infeed axis are incremental Depart contour absolute cancel radius compensation Retract in the infeed axis TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 35 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data The foliowing miscellaneous functions enable you to change the TNC s standard contouring behavior in certain situations Smoothing corners inserting rounding arcs at non tangential straight line transitions Machining small contour steps Machining open contours Programming machine referenced coordinates Smoothing corners M90 Standard behavior without M90 The TNC stops the axes briefly at sharp transitions such as inside corners and contours without radius compensation Advantages Reduced wear on the machine High definition of corners outside Note
90. ACTL e Servo lag the difference between nominal and actual positions 8 seen LAG Reference position the actual position as referenced to the scale reference point uo REF e Distance remaining to the programmed position the difference between actual and target positions S DIST The MOD function POSITION DISPLAY see figure 10 3 permits different types of position information for the status display and the additional status display The upper selection determines the position display in the status display The lower selection determines the position display in the additional status display TNC 425 1NC 415 B TNC 407 10 9 10 MOD Functions 10 8 Unit of Measurement This MOD function determines whether coordinates are displayed in millimeters metric system or inches To select the metric system e g X 15 789 mm set the CHANGE MM INCH function to MM The value is displayed with 3 digits after the decimal point To select the inch system e g X 0 6216 inch set the CHANGE MM INCH function to INCH The value is displayed with 4 digits after the decimal point 10 9 Programming Language for MDI 10 10 The PROGRAM INPUT mod function lets you decide whether to program the MDI file in HEIDENHAIN conversational dialog or in G codes in accordance with ISO To program the MDI H file in conversational dialog set the PROGRAM INPUT function to HEIDENHAIN
91. CK REPLACEMENT TOOL TOOL 3 u CEND On move MOVE PRSE END WORD UORD Hi FIND OVERURITE S gt lt lt TEXT Fig 4 18 Text editor screen with exercise text 4 27 4 Programming MM M MMMM LL 49 TextFiles Finding text sections You can search for a desired character or word with FIND at the far right of the first soft key row The following functions then appear Finding the current word You can search for the next occurrence of the word in which the cursor is presently located Exercise Find the word TOOL in the file ABC A Move the cursor to the word TOOL Select the search function Search for the current word TOOL Select the search function Find the text Terminate the search function 4 28 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 49 Text Files To erase and insert characters words and lines DELETE DELETE DELETE RESTORE CHAR WORD LINE LINE WORD Move the cursor to the text that you wish to erase or to the place where you wish to insert text DELETE Delete a character CHAR DELETE Delete and temporarily store a word UORD DELETE Delete and temporarily store a line LINE RESTORE Insert a line word from temporary storage LINE UORD Exercise Delete the first line of ABC A and insert it behind BY LUNCH Move the cursor to any position in the line JOBS a a TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 29
92. G71 Begin the program Program name 5121 dimensions in millimeters Define blank form for graphic workpiece simulation MIN and MAX point Define tool in the program Call tool in the infeed axis Z G17 Spindle speed S 2500 rpm Retract in the infeed axis rapid traverse miscellaneous function for tool change Pre position near the first contour point Pre position in the infeed axis spindle ON Move to with radius compensation Move to corner point Q Move to corner point 3 Move to corner point a Move to corner point 1 end of machining Depart the contour cancel radius compensation spindie STOP Retract in the infeed axis spindle OFF coolant OFF program stop return to block 1 End of program TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates G24 Chamfer The chamfer function enables you to cut off corners at the intersection of two straight lines Fig 5 17 Chamfer from to Enter the length L to be removed from each side of the corner Prerequisites The radius compensation before and after the chamfer block must be the same An inside chamfer must be large enough to accommodate the current tool Fig 5 18 Tool radius too large io The feed Prpa ae The comer pointE Resulting NC block G24 R5 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 13 5 Programming Tool Movements 5
93. G90 Z4100 MO6 Retract and insert tool N130 D04 Q13 P01 03 P02 2 oes The length of the pocket is halved for the path of traverse in block N200 The width of the pocket is halved for the paths of traverse in blocks N220 N300 Rounding radius for tangential approach Feed rate at corners is half the feed rate for linear traverse eee Start OF program Assign pocket data to the Q parameters Define workpiece blank N140 D04 Q14 POI 04 P02 2 sess N150 D04 Q16 P01 O6 P02 4 N160 D04 Q17 P01 07 P02 2 sss Continued on next page TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 21 7 Programming with Q Parameters ih ee en ee l 7 9 Programming Examples N170 X Q1 Y O2 M08 ooo ee ccceccccccceeeecteeneeeseeeee Pre position in X Y pocket center spindle ON N180 7 2 Lo ose eee re eite eros Pre position over workpiece N190 G01 Z Q5 FQ7 siinsesse isak eisa Move at feed rate Q7 100 to working depth Q5 15mm N200 G41 G91 X Q13 G90 Y QO2 oo sse First contour point on the side N210 G26 RQ16 M tenens SOFE tangential approach l with radius Q16 5 mm N220 G91 Y O14 N230 G25 RO6 N240 X O3 N250 G25 RO6 N260 Y O4 sa ceeascoesseseeeseenacessereestececiresetetserseeeees Mill sides of rectangular pocket incremental N270 G25 ROS N280 X O3 N290 G25 RO6 N300 Y 014 N310 G27 RQOT6 Lais diseecie iini irte Soft tangential departure N320 G00 G40 G90 X
94. Harte e vex eo EE nbz vende UM 8 17 Overlapping CONTOURS 3e roter tob ce tenere cr ete vea ee testy cepe ee epp esce epe ecce nee qe eR 8 19 PIEOT DRILEING GB6 oreet ear aa aoaaa sapaan Eaa a eee nodes ee anaes ereki 8 25 CONTOUR MILLING G58 G59 seen teens nettes neret entren nente 826 8 4 SLCycles Group Bi 5 a cc escteinesieesissesectinetberestoavucecsens 8 29 CONTOUR DATA 68120 innan araia a aa aa A a 8 30 PILOT DRILLING G121 eee e eiseseeeecen etm cte nece nee nonono vorosoonr onroro ronn oeros 8 31 ROUGH OUT CT a e E she r O RALEN 8 32 FLOOR FINISHING G123 eee e e e eii iieri pea 8 32 SIDE FINISHING 8124 ee eese tentntrtet tert tenen tet tese D nenene 8 33 CONTOUR TRAIN G125 ccccccecessesceccscasnenvsveeoevessssevenesersnsensesertiravscesesoreeserssereors 8 35 85 Coordinate Transformations ecce eese eere ennne e 8 37 DATUM SHIET G54 eed eot Cd eel ee e EIL 8 38 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables G53 esee 00000010 B40 MIRROR IMAGE G28 pU MS MERC E E tacos uate EE EE S o A SCALING FACTOR G72 8 45 8 6 Other ye cc PO 8 47 DWELE TIME GOA isset E E EE T E 8 47 PROGRAM CALI 339 5 aue eite rcd se leget e rte verd ive vase eon ae pa epa ea YES E ARN TET 8 47 ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP G36 o oo cceeeeecessssseesetecsssseeecssseeseressucesss
95. I Example application Correcting workpiece misalignment on machines with rotary tables Make a basic rotation with the 3D touch probe write down the ROTATION ANGLE then cancei the basic rotation again Change the operating mode gt POSITIONING MANUAL DATA INPUT Open the system file MDI Program the rotation Select the rotary table axis e Enter the ROTATION ANGLE you wrote down The rotary axis corrects the misalignment a TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 45 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 1 6 2 6 3 6 4 SuliDrografTi iu scdincs ice vececcdcvenccvescanccats aioi eiia eir ieai asi i Ore Sequence eee Operating limitations E Vacuum Programming and calling subprograms er a3 E A eek 63 Program Section Repeats esses eene ee OOD Operating sequence sss eem eigen ARES URN 6 5 Programming notes PEE ETETE s Programming and executing a 3 program Section repeat AE EAEE E SERERE NR Lacu 6 5 Main Program as Subprogram erre 8 8 Sequence Ave ee cit Detur ETETE MEER P AGO seu OB Operating limitations Lo ee e etd te pde oett dec dieere De eerie OO Caling a main program as a subprogram dene aen eo ore odes OO Mastinig E ees tani AEE PIG c a E EFE E D Nesting depth A O 6 9 Subprogram within a subprogram sssessseseeeenennenent emen enn 6 9 Repe
96. M03 Move tool to working depth Coordinates of the circle center Approach first contour point with radius compensation at machining feed rate N100 G26 R10 esses SOFT tangential approach N110 G02 X 50 Y 0 esses Mill arc around circle center 1 J direction of rotation negative clockwise coordinates of end point X 50mm Y 0 N120 G27 R10 Soft tangential departure N130 GOO G40 X 50 Y 40 sus Depart the contour cancel radius compensation N140 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis N99999 55201 G71 5 20 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates G02 G03 G05 Circular path with defined radius The tool moves on a circular path with radius R Defining the direction of rotation Clockwise G02 Counterclockwise G03 No definition GO5 the last programmed direction of rotation is used Inputs e Coordinates of the end point of the arc Radius R of the arc Fig 5 28 Circular path from to E with radius R For a full circle two G02 G03 blocks must be programmed in succession l The distance from the starting and end points of the arc cannot be greater than the diameter of the circle The maximum possible radius is 100 m Fig 5 29 Full circle with two G02 blocks Central angle CCA and arc radius R The starting point and end point on the contour can be connected with four different arcs of the same radius
97. MP 7430 and the too radius MP 7430 Function n Value e Overlap factor fof POCKETS seen cecidi eerte erase rere etie noto do sooo ta canat onsite genitis ieie s 0 1 to 1 414 Circular path tolerance This parameter sets the distance by which a programmed end point can be removed from the path of a perfect circle MP 7431 Function Value Circular path tolerance mm 0 0001 to 0 016 i ssssssasasasasasasasasasasasasasasasasastluat luaiauIaIassssstll TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 T1 13 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters Behavior of M functions Input value 0 to 31 sum of the values in the Value column MP 7440 Function Cases Programmable stop with M6 Program stop NO proGrarm StOD i Asses ec is ena ases cee deed usta se tet levees c eed Modal cycle call at end of block through M89 Program stop with M functions Cycle Call 3 scio net tei e e eee bec No cycle call e ee itecto etes cte ceo bes eaten Program stop MENTRE RURUTNERIOR esheets No DrOGFarm Stop 5456 5 iocis ecte tis teni tete rit i utter muta usate boven Kv factor can be switched Kv factor cannot be switched seen Switching the Kv factor through M105 and M106 Function not effective Function effective Reduce the feed rate in the tool axis with M103 F Safety limit for machining corners at a constant feed rate A corner whose angie is less than the entered v
98. Mj The depth of the workpiece surface is displayed according to the principle the deeper the darker The number of dispiayable depth levels can be selected with the soft keys TEST RUN mode 16 or 32 e PROGRAM RUN modes 160r 32 am fee E pom Plan view is the fastest of the three graphic lt sraer display modes Fig 1 22 TNC graphics plan view RESET 0 2 00 00 D store RDD ax OO 18 32 FORM Show 16 or 32 shades of depth ag 32 E aaaea 1 20 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Projection in 3 planes Fi Similar to a workpiece drawing the part is displayed with a pian view and two sectional planes A symbol to the lower left indicates whether the display is in first angle or third angie projection according to ISO 6433 selected with MP 7310 Details can be isolated in this display mode for magnification see page 1 24 et e a ze 228 E sms stet stop sese Wie Fig 1 23 TNC graphics projection in three planes Shifting planes The sectional planes can be shifted as desired The positions of the sectional planes are visible during shifting RESET STORE RDD RESET 00 00 00 BLK amp oro 3 a UU MM ME EM o E TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 21 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Cursor position during projection in 3 planes T
99. NC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 35 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 Moving the Machine Axes cccsccssesssessssressenseeseeseesseeensncnersenees 2 2 Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons oo cceeesssesecseeusevsccsevssessraces ee Traversing with an electronic handwheel 2 ec ceeseescssescssesecseesesecescessseesesseseaeessnsees 2 3 Using the HR 330 electronic handwheel essent 20d incremental jog positioning i eese esee eene entente ttt ra etait eh ba tr ceca att aecn 2 4 Positioning with manual data input IMDI sessanta enne ttrnnee 2 4 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F Miscellaneous Functions M 2 5 Entering the spindle speed S ssssseeee eite thee eeret aat et ennt senec 2 5 Entering a miscellaneous function M sesenta rernm ttes 220 Changing the spindle speed S sssssssssssessesee eene tne este eene rte tr ence 2 6 Changing the feed rate F a eseessessessssnscssssccsssscccssouceensesnerssssesssseuseassueusucorsenseescenes 2 6 Setting the Datum Without a 3D Touch Probe 2 7 Setting the datum in the tool axis sss eterne nere erh ee th senten 2 7 Setting the datum in the working plane isset 2 3D Touch Prob s nisiodo eiit Epig er eub o va Feed Faxhsken viu oaaae EE RR a 2 9 3D touch probe applications esee iissssssssssseeeeee
100. PTH the tool will drill to the programmed total hole depth in one operation The PECKING DEPTH does not have to be a multiple of the TOTAL HOLE DEPTH If the PECKING DEPTH is programmed greater than the TOTAL HOLE DEPTH the tool only advances to the specified TOTAL HOLE DEPTH DWELL TIME in seconds Amount of time the tool remains at the total hole depth for chip breaking e FEEDF Traversing speed of the tool during drilling Calculations The advanced stop distance tis automatically calculated by the control e Ata total hole depth of up to 30 mm t 0 6 mm e Ata total hole depth exceeding 30 mm t total hole depth 50 Maximum advanced stop distance 7 mm 84 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles Example PECKING Hole coordinates X 20mm Y 30mm X 80mm Y 50mm Hole diameter 6 mm Setup clearance 2 mm Total hole depth 15 mm Pecking depth 10 mm Dwell time 1 Feed rate PECKING cycle in a part program S85 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 3 N40 T1 G17 1200 N50 G83 P01 2 P02 15 PO3 10 PO4 1 PO5 80 0t N60 GOO G40 G90 2100 M06 N80 Z 2 M99 N90 X 80 Y 50 M99 N100 24100 M02 N99999 965851 G71 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 Start of program Define workpiece blank Define tool Call tool Define PECKING cycle 1s REtract in the infeed axis insert tool N70 X 20 Y 30 MO
101. Parameters 11 20 Overlap factor Q112 The overlap factor for pocket milling MP 7430 is assigned to Q112 Unit of measurement for dimensions in the part program Q113 The value of parameter Q113 specifies whether the highest level NC program for nesting with PGM CALL is programmed in millimeters or inches Dimensions of the main program Parameter value Metric system mm Q113 inch system Q113 Tool length 0114 The current value for the tool length is assigned to Q114 Coordinates after probing during program run Q115 to Q119 contain the coordinates of the spindie position at the moment of contact during a programmed measurement with the 3D touch probe The length and radius of the probe tip are not compensated in these coordinates Coordinate axis Parameter X axis Y axis Z axis IVth axis Vth axis TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 14 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 4 Diagrams for Machining Spindie speed S The spindle speed S can be calculated from the tool radius A and the cutting speed Vas follows V 2nR S Units S in V in R in rpm m min mm You can either read the spindle speed directly off the diagram below or calculate it with the above formula Example Too radius Cutting velocity Spindie speed N lt ca Tool radius Rimm AMAN ETT VE t dni lcu D tr a he et eng Si En V uoa GN eed ene E TT AREE LECS A RY I APR ON anat A
102. Q4 P01 8 P02 Q2 Calculates and assigns the quotient of two values Not permitted division by 0 D5 SQUARE ROOT Example D05 Q20 P01 4 Calculates and assigns the square root of a number Not permitted square root of a negative number In the above table values can be any of the following two numbers two Q parameters anumber and a Q parameter The Q parameters and numerical vaiues in the equations can be entered with positive or negative signs TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 7 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions Programming example for basic arithmetical operations Assign the value 10 to parameter O5 and assign the product of Q5 and the value 7 to Q12 Select PARAMETER Select BASIC ARITHMETIC Select function DO ASSIGN FIRST VALUE PARAMETER ag Assign numerical value to parameter O5 ri 7 8 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions Select PARAMETER Select BASIC ARITHMETIC Select function D3 MULTIPLICATION FIRST VALUE PARAMETER l d i ne iia SECOND VALUE PARAMETER 1 Resulting NC blocks FNO Q5 10 FN3 Q12 Q5 47 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 9 7 Programming with O Parameters 7 3 Trigonometric Functions Sine cosine and tangent are terms designating the ratios of the sides of right tri
103. RATION soft key Example retracting the spindle after tool breakage interrupt machining MANUAL Enable the machine axis direction buttons OPERATION Move the axes with the machine axis direction buttons 5 Resuming program run after an interruption vio enable the axis s direction buttons When a program run is interrupted the TNC stores The data of the last tool calied Active coordinate transformations The coordinates of the last defined circle center The count of a running program section repetition The number of the last CALL LBL block The stored data are used for returning the tool to the contour after manual machine axis positioning during an interruption RESTORE POSITION The TNC recaiculates these data for resuming program run at a certain block RESTORE POS AT N Resuming program run with the START button You can resume program run by pressing the START button if the progran was interrupted in one of the foliowing ways The machine STOP button was pressed A programmed interruption ma 3 6 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 2 Program Run Resuming program run after an error e lf the error message is not blinking Remove the cause of the error Clear the error message from the screen Restart the program or resume program run at the place at which it was interrupted lf the error message is blinking Switch off the TNC and the machin
104. Run and Program Run 3 2 Program Run Interrupting machining There are various ways to interrupt a program run Programmed interruptions e Machine STOP key Switching to PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK Hf the TNC registers an error during program run it automatically interrupts the machining process Programmed interruptions nterruptions can be programmed directly in the part program The part program is interrupted at a block containing one of the following entries G33 Miscellaneous function MO M02 or M30 e Miscellaneous function M06 determined by the machine tool builder To interrupt or abort machining immediately The block which the TNC is currently executing is not completed Interrupt machining The symbol in the status display blinks Program run can be aborted with the INTERNAL STOP function INTERNAL Abort machining STOP The symbol in the status display goes out To interrupt machining at the end of the current block You can interrupt the program run at the end of the current block by switching to the PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK mode Select PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 5 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 2 Program Run Moving machine axes during an interruption You can move the machine axes during a program interruption in the same way as in the MANUAL OPERATION mode Simply enable the machine axis direction buttons by pressing the MANUAL OPE
105. S esee nere nne reae Pre position for the first hole spindle ON Pre position in Z to setup clearance cail cycle Move to second hole call cycle Retract in the infeed axis end of program 8 5 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles TAPPING with floating tap holder G84 th Process e The thread is cut in one pass Once the tool has reached the total hole depth the direction of spindle rotation is reversed and the tool is retracted to the starting position at the end of the dwell time Atthe starting position the direction of spindie rotation reverses once again Required tool A floating tap holder is required It must compen sate the tolerances between feed rate and spindle speed during the tapping process Fig 8 2 TAPPING cycle Input data e SETUP CLEARANCE 8 Distance between tooi tip at starting position and workpiece surface Standard value approx 4 x thread pitch e TOTAL HOLE DEPTH B thread length Distance between workpiece surface and end of thread The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative sign means negative working direction DWELL TIME Enter a dwell time between 0 and 0 5 seconds to avoid wedging of the tool during retraction further information is available from the machine manufacturer FEED F Traversing speed of the tool during tapping Calculations The feed rate is calculated as follows Sxp where F is the feed rate mm min
106. S bs Passes etter ROTATION G73 uo ceccccccseesecsseeeereneees MENTRE 844 SCALING FACTOR G72 8 45 Other Cycles Wr OR ROTTER MTR RUNE vd PROGRAM CALL G39 E ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP 636 8 48 8 t Cycies 8 1 General Overview of Cycles Frequently recurring machining sequences that comprise several working steps are stored in the control memory as standard cycles Coordinate transformations and other special functions are also provided as standard cycles These cycles are grouped into the following types Simple fixed cycles such as pecking and tapping as well as the milling operations slot milling rectangular pocket milling and circular pocket milling SL Subcontour List Cycles group I These allow machining of relatively complex contours composed of several overlapping subcon tours SL Cycles group ll for contour oriented machining During rough out and finishing the tool follows the contour as defined in the SL cycles The cutter infeed positions are determined automatically by the control Coordinate transformation cycles These enable datum shifts rotation mirroring enlarging and reducing for various contours Special cycles such as dwell time program call and oriented spindle Stop Programming a cycle 82 Defining a cycle Enter the G function for the desired cycie and program it in the dialog The following example illustrates how cycles are defined Select a cycle
107. SSIGN coordinates to the parameters for pre positioning N40 DOO Q21 PO1 50 eese the touch probe N50 DOO O22 P01 10 N60 DOO Q23 P01 0 N70 TO G17 N80 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 M06 insert probe N90 G55 P01 10 P02 Z X 011 Y Q12 Z Q13 Probe in negative direction store Z coordinate in Q10 first point N100 X Q21 Y 022 Intermediate positioning for second measurement N110 G55 P01 20 P02 Z X O21 Y Q22 Z 023 Probe in negative direction store Z coordinate in Q20 second point N120 D02 Q1 P01 Q20 P02 O10 Measure height of island and assign to Q1 N130 G38 m ennemis Program stop Q1 can be checked see also page 7 14 N140 Z 100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis and end the program N99999 9637171 G71 7 20 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 9 Programming Examples Rectangular pocket with island corner rounding and tangential approach Pocket center coordinates Pocket length Pocket width Working depth Corner radius Milling feed rate 50 mm O1 50 mm O2 90 mm Q3 70 mm Q4 215 mm Q5 10 mm O6 200 mm min O7 Part program 96S77EQ71 E N10 DOO Q1 P01 50 N20 DOO Q2 P01 50 N30 DOO Q3 P01 90 N40 DOO O4 P01 70 N50 DOO Q5 P01 15 N60 DOO Q6 P01 10 N70 DOO Q7 P01 200 N80 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N90 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N100 G99 T1 L 0 R 5 Define too N110 T1 G17 S1000 esses Call tool N120 G00 G40
108. T and PRINT TEST functions set the destination for the trans ferred data Applications Transferring values with the Q parameter function FN15 Transferring digitized surface data The TNC mode of operation determines whether the PRINT or PRINT TEST function is used TNC mode of operation Transfer function PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK PRINT PROGRAM RUN FULL SEQUENCE PRINT TEST RUN PRINT TEST PRINT and PRINT TEST can be set as follows Transfer data via RS 232 RS 232 Transfer data via RS 422 RS 422 Save data to a file in the TNC FILE Do not save data Vacant Files in the TNC FILE setting Digitized data PROGRAM RUN Set as in the RANGE cycle Values with FN15 PROGRAM RUN FN15RUN A Values with FN15 TEST RUN FNISSIM A To change a setting type it into the highlight and confirm by pressing ENT reer 10 6 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions 10 5 Machine Specific User Parameters The machine tool builder can assign functions to up to 16 user parame ters For more detailed information on user parameters refer to your machine operating manual 10 6 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space The DATUM SET soft key enables you to graphically check the position of the workpiece blank in the machine s working space and to activate the work space monitoring in the TEST RUN mode of operation zi n OPERATION Available traversing range referenced to the displayed workpiece biank W
109. TIS WO as Eie cz m rie a ae AUT eme SEATS POE MAN Bp aS dA Es SEES Lier ae Steen Bates m SES oe 7 ES AEIR Pais T pet oy Ca a S Pe ER eS Se UADIT 15mm 50 m min 500 rpm lated S 530 rpm EAS Se MR ee ees ena IDEO PE I PS d SAT BO gm eee avrg aia aang io ame aoe en prope BREE BD aeo oho dine Proline poe Ps es Sedge reac e pvr uet renes Un a eee ri retire Leer a EUM y OEA AS e EG Mee e arte ree meae RII ped ERU e qm ene ec prora tec een ROR VA P SILT mit met ANE I DE Za EUN RN AF e a SEEN RET ere e ais RAE ceu Hi Rae AN De natem ee QA NNR ge oY 3 Tae ameter PAI Sep ROSA LS cos A Ae A Ie m Re ERR pa ns ER La ANAN MB PA eh AE I eal S Si cert IU EET ERE RU Li LIN ES Rabat aL pSV ASD ata e ae em m en dai m one T MET aE UO T regredi atm reet ue ADI RUIN AE lag T a SVS A De Retr MILLA pte Nee Er e o eA SYA nC Sat es a AD vince Rename A Cutting velocity V m min TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 21 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams T PNRA a a a eS 11 4 Diagrams for Machining Feed rate F The feed rate of the tool Fis calculated from the number of tool teeth n the permissible depth of cut per tooth d and the spindle speed S F n d S Units F in mm min d in mm S in rpm The feed rate that is read from the diagram must be multiplied by the number of tool teeth Exampie Depth of cut per tooth d 0
110. The arcs have different lengths and curvatures Larger arc CCA 180 arc is longer than a semicircle Input Radius R with negative sign R lt 0 Smaller arc CCA 180 arc is shorter than a semicircle Input Radius R with positive sign R 0 CCA gt 180 CCA lt 180 Fig 5 30 Arcs with central angles greater than and less than 180 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 21 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Contour curvature and direction of rotation The direction of rotation determines the type of arc Convex curving outward or G02 G41 R 0 Fig 5 31 Convex path e Concave curving inward G03 G41 R gt 0 Fig 5 32 Concave path To program a circular arc with a defined radius Circle Cartesian clockwise Enter the coordinates of the arc end point for example X 10 mm Y 2 mm Enter the radius of the arc for example R 5 mm and determine the size of the arc using the sign negative in this example Further entries if necessary Radius compensation Feedrate Miscelianeous function Resulting NC block G02 G41 X 10 Y 2 R 5 EE a c 5 22 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movernents 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Example for exercise Milling a concave semicircle Semicircle radius Coordinates of the are starting point x lt ou e Coordinates of the arc end point Too
111. UN modes of operation immedi nt aiH 1 18 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays In the program run operating modes except on TNC 407 and test run operating modes the TNC provides the following three display modes Plan view Projection in three planes 3D view The display mode is selected with the soft keys On the TNC 415 B and TNC 425 workpiece machining can aiso be graphically simulated in real time The TNC graphic depicts the workpiece as if it were being machined by a cylindrical end mill If tool tables are used a spherical cutter can also be depicted see page 4 10 The graphics window will not show the workpiece if the current program has no valid blank form definition no program is selected With machine parameters MP7315 to MP7317 a graphic is generated even if no tool axis is defined or moved The graphics cannot show rotary axis movements Graphics during program run A graphical representation of a running program is not possible if the microprocessor of the TNC is already occupied with complicated machin ing tasks or if large areas are being machined Example Stepover milling of the entire biank form with a large tool The TNC interrupts the graphics and displays the text ERROR in the graphics window The machining process is continued however TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Plan view
112. X 50 N170 G25 R7 5 N180 X 100 Y 80 N190 G98 LO N99999 9658371 G71 8 36 N30 G99 T1 L O R410 sss Start of program Define workpiece blank wasn Define tool weceseeeee Call tool Cycle definition Contour Geometry N60 G125 Q12 12 03 40 Q5 0 Q7 10 Q102 2 Q11 100 Q12 200 Q15241 oot N70 GOO G40 G90 24100 M3 oe eene CYCIE call edens Cycle definition Contour Train 2 REtract in the infeed axis spindle ON eese COntour subprogram TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations Once a contour has been programmed it can be positioned on the workpiece at various locations and in different sizes through the use of coordinate transformations The following cycles are available for this DATUM SHIFT G53 G54 MIRROR IMAGE G28 e ROTATION G73 e SCALING G72 The originai contour must be marked in the part program as a subprogram or a program section Duration of effect A coordinate transformation becomes effective as soon as it is defined and remains in effect until it is changed or cancelled Cancellation Coordin te transformations can be cancelled in the following ways Define cycles for basic behavior with a new value such as scaling factor 1 Execute a miscellaneous function M02 or M30 or an N99999 96 block depending on machine parameters Select a new program Fig 8 41 Examples of coordinate tran
113. XD CTS TXD RTS DSR OTR GND Signal BXD CTS XD RTS DSR DOOMYNAMA9HAWN OWONIAORWH Q0 4000 NA 15 e e 12 BNGN i3 HH RD BL H Fig 9 3 Pin layout of the RS 422 V 11 interface gh The pin layouts on the TNC 1ogic unit 0x22 and on ihe adapter block ae identical e a S M MH 96 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 External Data Transfer 9 4 Preparing the Devices for Data Transfer HEIDENHAIN devices att HEIDENHAIN devices FE floppy disk unit and ME magnetic tape unit are already adapted to the TNC They can be used for deta transfer without further adjustments Example FE 401 floppy disk unit Connect the power cable to the FE Connect the FE and TNC with the data interface cable Switch on the FE insert a floppy disk into the upper drive Format the disk if necessary Set the interface see page 10 4 Transfer the data The memory capacity of a floppy disk is given in sectors The baud rate can be selected at the FE 401 Non HEIDENHAIN devices The TNC and non HEIDENHAIN devices must be adapted to each other Adapting a non HEIDENHAIN DEVICE to the TNC e PC Adapt the software Printer Adjust the DIP switches Adapting the TNC to a non HEIDENHAIN device Set the user parameters 5020 0 to 5210 0 for EXT1 5020 1 to 5210 1 for EXT2 The two settings can be adjusted for example to a PC e g EXT1 or toa printer EXT2
114. abling switch on back of handwheel Interpolation _ Traverse in mm per factor revolution 0 20 10 5 2 5 1 25 0 625 0 312 0 156 0 078 0 039 0 019 se OOIN ON A WN Fig 2 1 Interpolation factors for handwheel speed Fig 2 2 HR 330 electronic handwheei g The smallest programmable interpolation factor depends on the specific machine tool Af is also possible to move the axes with the handwheel during a program run see page 5 43 Using the HR 330 electronic handwheel Attach the handwheei to a stee surface with the mounting magnets such that it cannot be operated unintentionally When you remove the handwhee from its position be careful not to accidentally press the axis direction keys until the enabling switch is inhibited When you hold the handwheel in your hand for machine setup you must press the enabling switch before you can move the axes with the axis direction keys TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 3 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 1 Moving the Machine Axes Incremental jog positioning With incremental jog positioning a machine axis moves by a preset distance each time you press the corresponding machine axis direction button Fig 2 3 Incremental jog positioning in the X axis P evecrronic nanowareL INTERPOLATION FACTOR Enter the jog increment here 8 mm Press the machine axis direction button as often as desired Incremental jog positioning m
115. achine geometry with tilted axes M1 14 5 42 Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 sessesssssseeeeeer nsen 5 43 Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 X Y Z 5 43 Positioning with Manual Data Input System File SIMDI 5 44 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 1 General information on Programming Tool Movements Tool movements are always programmed as if the tool moves and the workpiece remains stationary q Before running amp part progra malwa iti workpiece Radius compens tion and ction must teman active EERE A ee IT Ne atc E rere ly ae AL Mo nap mar te ie Bit QE an ra Example NC block N30 G00 G40 G90 Z 100 Path functions Each elernent of the workpiece contour is entered separately using path functions You enter Straight lines Circular arcs You can also program a combination of the two contour elements helical paths Fig 5 1 A contour consists of straight lines and circuiar arcs The contour elements are executed in sequence to machine the programmed contour Fig 5 2 Contour elements are programmed and executed in sequence E Eid Mais iter P ca cc ER Eye imo TICES TED 52 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 1 General Information on Programming Tool Movements Subprograms and program section repeats If a machining sequence occurs several times in a p
116. al Functions 7 7 Overview eh E o eese eb testati re D ete cdort sdt etes eck aes 7 7 Trigonometric Functions eere erre oss 7 10 OVelVie W 5 kl eere tite Doe tees vei eese ete rp C eras n D Nee E ees 7 10 If Then Decisions with Q Parameters eere 2711 Overview esses Checking and Changing Q Parameters sees 7 13 Diverse Functions een eere nne nenne iens eosesensseesess 1714 Displaying error messages oo eee ceeseseseecteceseatseecaeeceereneneeesesnetectetesssssstsnsesteeseereres J 14 Output through an external data interface essence 1719 Transfer to the PLC sss MN ETT Meehan uated hee ET Es Entering Formulas Directly eee 7 16 Overview Of TUnICtIOnis iuiee dome eene tr teo ta s cepe ibaa eb da ea dpa Dag dn e go dadas EHE sa mE dues 7 16 R les for formulas oe tete r cease acu e pea ee hon see tede ur eoa e eene enatis 7 18 Measuring with the 3D Touch Probe During Program Run 7 19 Programming Examples E E E aaneny E A O DA Rectangular pocket with island corner rounding and tangential approach 7 21 Bolt hole CIrcle 1e eise erice saei ce cocer Reano ra see si antra a ER Udo PEN vene aae Enos ane sa eds ots d C J RE Hemisphere machined with end mill
117. al interpolation A helix is a combination of circular motion in a main plane and linear motion in a plane perpendicular to the main plane Helices can only be programmed in polar coordinates Applications You can use helical interpolation with form cutters to machine Large diameter internal and external threads Lubrication grooves Fig 5 40 A helix combines circular motion with linear motion input Total incremental angie of tool traverse on the helix e Tota height of the helix Total incremental angle Calculate the totai incremental polar angle G91 H as follows H n 360 where n is the number of revolutions of the helical path G91 H can be programmed with any value from 5400 to 5400 i e up to n 15 Total height Enter the height of the helix referenced to the tool axis The height is determined as follows h n P where nis the number of thread revolutions and P ts the thread pitch Radius compensation Enter the radius compensation for the helix Internal thread Work direction Radius comp according to the table at right Right handed G41 Left handed G42 Right handed G42 Left handed G41 Radius comp Right handed Left handed Right handed Left handed Fig 5 41 The shape of the helix determines the direction of rotation and the radius compensation A D i E E I i MM TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 33 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 5 5 34 Path Contours P
118. alog text 0 to 299 D14 ERROR CODE 0 299 300 to 399 PLC ERROR 0 99 400 to 499 CYCLE PARAMETER 0 99 Your machine tool bulder me may have programmed a dialog te sentra differs from me bove re EAE M tA cC C ee 7 14 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with O Parameters 7 6 Diverse Functions Output through an external data interface 015 PRINT The function D15 PRINT transfers the values of Q parameters and error messages through the data interface for example to a printer e D15 PRINT with numerical values up to 200 Example D15 PRINT 20 Transfers the corresponding error message see overview for D14 D15 PRINT with Q parameter Example D15 PRINT Q20 Transfers the value of the corresponding Q parameter You can transfer up to six Q parameters and numerica values simultane ousiy The TNC separates them with slashes Example D15 PO1 1 P02 Q1 P03 2 P04 Q2 Transfer to the PLC 013 PLC The function D19 PLC transfers up to two numerical values or Q parameters to the PLC increments and units 0 1 um or 0 0001 Example D19 P01 10 P02 03 The numerica value 10 means 1 um or 0 001 AL M TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 15 7 P
119. alue will be machined at a reduced feed rate if radius compensation is RO or tf the angle is at an inside corner This feature does not work during operation with servo lag or feed precon trol Fig 11 1 Sharpest permissible angle for constant contouring speed MP 7460 Function Value eere 0 0000 to 179 9999 Constant feed rate in corners for inside angles in degrees sess 11 14 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters Coordinate system for datums from a datum table MP 7475 Function Datums from a table are referenced to the workpiece datum sss eise titan Datums from a table are referenced to the machine datum Parameters for the electronic handwheel Setting the TNC for handwheel operation Input value 0 to 5 MP 7640 Function No handwheel C JE HR 330 with additional keys the handwheel keys for traverse direction and rapid traverse are evaluated by the NC HR 130 without additional keys T c RM HR 330 with additional keys the keys for traverse direction and rapid traverse are evaluated by the PLC HR 332 with twelve additional keys Fixed axis handwheels with additional keys Interpolation factor MP 7641 Function interpolation factor is entered at the keyboard Interpolation factor is set by the PLC TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 15 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 Genera
120. amming parallel axes Machining operations can aiso be programmed in parallel axes as SL cycles In this case graphic simulation is not available The parallel axes must lie in the machining piane input data Parallel axes are programmed in the first coordinate block positioning block 1 J K block of the first subprogram called in cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY Coordinate axes entered subsequently will be ignored E T Te i TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 15 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group 1 CONTOUR GEOMETRY G37 Application All subprograms that are superimposed to define the contour are listed in cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY input data Enter the LABEL numbers of the subprograms Up to 12 label numbers can be defined Activation G37 becomes effective as soon as it is defined Fig 8 13 Example of an SL contour A and B are pockets C and Dare islands Example G99 T3 L 0 R 3 5 T3 G17 1500 sese Working plane perpendicular to Z axis G37 P01 1 P022 P03 3 G00 G40 Z 100 M2 GOB L1 iu oe e use ee aT eden First contour label for cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY G01 G42 XFO Y 10 occ cccecsesessseseesseseeeeseeereeesees Machining in the X Y plane X 20 Y 10 1 50 J 50 8 16 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group 1 ROUGH OUT G57 The ROUGH OUT cycle specifies cutting path end partitioning Sequence The control positions the too in the tool axis over the first infeed poin
121. and TNC 425 E have the following limitations input and machining accuracy are limited to 1 um e Simultaneous linear movement in no more than 3 axes The versions otherwise differ only in technical details such as the type of speed control block execution time contro loop cycle time and memory capacity The machine manufacturer adapts the features offered by the TNC to the capabilities of the machine tool by adjusting the machine parameters This means that not every machine tool will have all the functions described in this manual Some of the TNC functions which are not available on every machine are Probing functions for the 3D touch probe Rigid tapping Re approaching a contour after an interruption If you think a function may be unavailable because of a defect please contact the machine tool builder ne a Sa H oiiiii Qua UM J4 ilU5 5 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 This manual is intended for both TNC newcomers and experienced users If you re new to TNC you can use the User s Manual as a step by step workbook The manuai begins with an explanation of the basics of numerical control NC and provides a glimpse into their application in the TNC It then introduces the technique of conversational programming All of the examples given can be practiced directly on the TNC Each function is explained thoroughly when it is used for the
122. and distances for the POCKET MILLING cycle Direction of rotation for roughing out Clockwise G75 Counterciockwise G76 Input data Setup clearance Milling depth The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative value means negative working direction Pecking depth O FEED RATE FOR PECKING Traversing speed of the tool during penetration FIRST SIDE LENGTH Pocket length parallel to the first main axis of the machining plane SECOND SIDE LENGTH Fig 8 8 Side lengths of the pocket Pocket width The signs of the side lengths are always positive e FEED RATE Traversing speed of the tool in the machining piane Calculations The stepover factor k is calculated as follows k KxR where Kis the overlap factor preset by the machine manufacturer and A is the cutter radius Corner radius The corner radius is determined by the radius of the milling tool Fig 8 9 Tool path for roughing out TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 11 8 Cycles 8 2 8 12 Simple Fixed Cycles Example Rectangular pocket milling Pocket center coordinates 60 mm Y 35 mm Setup clearance 2 mm Milling depth 10 mm Pecking depth 4 mm Feed rate for pecking 80 mm min First side length 80 mm Second side length 40 mm Milling feed rate Direction of cutter path POCKET MILLING cycle in a part program 968812 G71 5 a ena hone SN OUR N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 sss N2
123. angles For a right triangle the trigonometric functions of the angle are defined by the equations sina afc cosa be tana a b sina cosa where cis the side opposite the right angle e ais the side opposite angle a bthe third side The angle can be found from the tangent ct arc tan a arc tan a b arc tan sin a cos Fig 7 3 Sides and angles on a right triangie Example a 10mm b i0mm arctan a b arc tan 1 45 Furthermore h C 2 a czy p Select the trigonometric functions to call the following options D estes OE em mmm U A E E E e a S D a EE DE D BS D13 SINCE COS X 8 LEN V A ANG Y Overview D6 SINE Example D06 Q20 P01 Q5 BG Calculate the sine of an angle in degrees SINOD and assign it to a parameter D7 COSINE Example D07 Q21 P01 Q5 D Calculate the cosine of an angle in degrees COS X and assign it to a parameter D8 ROOT SUM OF SQUARES Example D08 O10 P01 5 P02 4 DS Take the square root of the sum of two squared X LEN Y numbers and assign it to a parameter D13 ANGLE Example D13 Q20 P01 10 P02 Q1 Calculate the angle from the arc tangent of two sides or from the sine and cosine of the angle 0 lt angle lt 360 and assign it to a parameter 013 X ANG V i 7 10 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 4 lf Then Decisions with Q Parameters The TNC can make lo
124. ansferring files Transferring files from the TNC to an external device The highlight is on a file that is stored in the TNC TRANSFER Transfer selected fiie TNC Ex TRANSFER Transfer all files D e INC EXT e Select files consecutively for individual TRRNSFER transfer Press ENT to transfer otherwise press NO ENT TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC407 9 3 9 External Data Transfer 9 2 Selecting and Transferring Files Transferring files from an external device to the TNC Use the cursor key to move the highlight to a file that is stored in the external device TRANSFER Transfer the selected file TNC Ex e Transfer all files TRANSFER Y a 3 TNC EXT Select files consecutively for individual f TRANSFER transter Press ENT to transfer otherwise press NO ENT The EXT Interrupt transfer You can interrupt data transfer by pressing the END key or the END soft key qi e f the TNC recognizes erroneously transferred program blocks it will mark them with ERROR These blocks must then be correct d in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode if you want to transfer files between two TNCs start transmission from the receiving TNC Blockwise transfer TEST RUN FILE NAME EREREEEEEEEENMEEER H The menu to the right is for blockwise transfer see page 3 11 First select as usual the name of the file to be transferred blockwise Then start data transfer with the SELECT soft key Fig 9 15 Menu
125. as at inside corners and moves the tool over this point M97 is programmed in the same block as the outside corner point Duration of effect M97 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed Fig 5 45 Contouring behavior with M97 us A comer machined with M97 will not be completely finished it may have to be reworked with a smaller tool Program structure G99 L R420 oo eee eeeeeeresstecssseeeeeee Large tool radius G01 X Y M97 Move to contour point 13 GST Y50 5 o5 Le Eo cese SE OE Machine small contour step 13 14 Move to contour point 15 Machine smali contour step 15 16 sess Move to contour point 17 The outside corners are programmed in blocks N20 and N50 These are the blocks in which you program M97 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 37 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data Machining open contours M98 Standard behavior without M98 The TNC calculates the intersections of the cutter paths and moves the tool in the new direction at those points If the contour is open at the corners however this will result in incomplete machining Fig 5 46 Tool path without M98 Machining open corners with M98 With M98 the TNC temporarily suspends radius compensation to ensure that both corners are compietely machined Duration of effect M8 is effective only in the blocks in which it is programmed Fig 5 47 Tool path
126. ate new files edit existing files This chapter describes the basic functions and inputs that do not yet cause machine axis movement The entry of geometry for workpiece machining is described in the next chapter 4 1 Creating Part Programs Layout of a program Program block A part program consists of individual program blocks The TNC numbers the blocks in ascending seguence The block number increment is defined N10 G00 G40 G90 X 100 Y 20 M3 in MP 7220 see page 11 7 Program blocks consist of units of information called words Path function Block Words number Fig 41 Program blocks consist of words of specific information e Continue dialog e Ignore dialog question e End block Delete block delete word 4 2 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 1 Creating Part Programs Editing functions Editing means entering adding to or changing commands in programs The TNC enables you to Enter data with the keyboard Select desired blocks and words insert and erase blocks and words Correct wrong values and commands Easily clear TNC messages from the screen 9 9 9 9 Types of inputs Numbers coordinate axes and radius compensation are entered directly by keyboard You can set the algebraic sign either before during or after a numerical entry Selecting blocks and words To cail a block with a certain block number d ag The highlight jumps to block number 10
127. ating program section repeats Line Repeating subprograms s sese eee teen cote eene O12 6 Subprograms and Pragram Section Repeats 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats Subprograms and program section repeats enable you to program a machining sequence once and then run it as often as desired Labels Subprograms and program section repeats are marked by labels A label is identified by a number between 0 and 254 Each label except label 0 can be set only once in a program Labels are set with G98 LABEL 0 marks the end of a subprogram 6 1 Subprograms Sequence The main program is executed up to the block in which a subprogram in called with Ln O The subprogram is then executed from beginning to end G98 LO The main program is then resumed from the block after the subprogram call Z 100 M2 G98 L1 G98 LO No9999 96 Operating limitations s Fig 6 1 Flow diagram for subprogramming jump e return jump A main program can contain up to 254 subprograms Subprograms can be called in any sequence and as often as desired A subprogram cannot call itself Subprograms should be written at the end of the main program behind the block with M2 or M30 f subprograms are located before the block with M02 or M30 they will be executed at least once even if they are not called A LLLLLL
128. aud ASSIGN Assigns either the RS 232 or the RS 422 interface to the operating modes PRINT Outputs digitized data through RS 232 RS 422 or FILE Setting the RS 232 interface The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS 232 interface are entered in the upper left of the screen Setting the RS 422 interface The mode of operation and baud rates for the RS 422 interface are entered in the upper right of the screen Selecting the OPERATING MODE HEIDENHAIN fioppy disk units FE 401 B FE 401 with program no 230 626 03 or higher HEIDENHAIN FE 401 floppy disk unit with program number below 230 626 03 PC with HEIDENHAIN data transfer software TNC EXE HEIDENHAIN ME 101 magnetic tape unit ME no longer produced Non HEIDENHAIN devices such as a printers EXT1 tape punchers PCs without TNC EXE EXT2 PC with HEIDENHAIN software LSV2 TNC REMOTE for remote operation The HEIDENHAIN ME 101 magnetic tape unit ME mode of operation can only be used in the TNC mode of oparta PROGRAMMING AND EDITING NENNEN KK Mr LL 10 4 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions 10 4 Setting the External Data interfaces Downward compatibility For programs that are transferred through the external data interface the resolution of the numerical data can be set to 0 1 um or 1 um The 1 um setting transfers the data with only 3 places after the decimal point in the metric system 4 places in the inch sys
129. axes Geometrical incompatibilities e Missing data e Impossible jumps The following functions can be used in the TEST RUN operating mode Blockwise test run Interrupt test at any block Block skip Blockwise transfer of very long programs from external storage media Graphic simulation Measurement of machining time Additional status display To run a program test Test the entire program STRRT SINGLE Test each program block individually RESET e Show the blank form and test the entire program STRRT interrupt the test run i 3 2 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 1 Test Run To run a program test up to a certain block With the STOP AT N function the TNC does a test run up to the block with block number N Select the TEST RUN mode and go to the program beginning Select a partial test run NIG DEE 018 PO 90 Enter the block number N at which you wish the test to stop Enter the name of the program that contains the block with block number N If N is located in a program section repetition enter the number of repetitions that you wish to run Test the program up to the entered block The display functions for test run In the TEST RUN operating mode the TNC offers functions for displaying a program in pages Go back in the program by one screen page Go forward in the program by one screen page Go to
130. call TO G17 Tool change position G00 G40 G90 Z 100 M06 Tool call T1 G17 1000 Starting position next to the workpiece X 20 Y 20 M03 Working depth Z 20 1st contour point with radius compensation RL G01 G41 X 0 Y 0 F200 Tangential approach G26 R15 Straight line Y 100 Chamfer G24 R20 Straight line X 100 Rounding G25 R20 Straight line Y 25 Circle center 1 100 J40 G03 G91 X 25 Y 25 G01 G90 X 0 Y 0 Circle incremental Last contour point absolute Tangential departure G27 R15 End position next to the workpiece G00 G40 X 20 Y 20 Retract return to start of program Z 100 M02 HEIDENHAIN TNC 407 TNC 415B TNC 425 ISO Programming D ojoxcrs loe Di Foe Eo Machine programming The keyboard and the display mode can be switched to machine control or programming using the shift key on the visual display unit Machine control i Manual e Handwheel Positioning This mode is for executing NC blocks which contain all a with information for a positioning move or machining step MDI also applies to feed rates circle centers and cycles The blocks are stored in the program MDI In this mode the axes can be moved with the machine axis direction buttoris Use the soft keys to enter the spindle speed M functions and datum points and to call the probing functions for the 3D touch probe Here the axes can be moved either with an electronic hand wheel or with the machine axis direction butto
131. cecidi a eo Saad lS TOO CHANGES M RT 443 Automatic tool change M101 on cccccccecccsecseccneesssusecesscseresceesaatereacceesesscecssesaceneecsees 4 14 43 Tool Compensation Values esses EAA A pnse e en 4 15 Effect of tool compensation values sess sesenta cct tnnn ranean 4 15 Tool radius compensation cecescesecssceeseseserecsesscsescussesaenseesssascceeearsesssenessesatsesessnsees 4005 uer pareti n EE 44 Program lnitiation deii accitus bddn x eredi Rl plc ei sux eene 4 18 Defining the blank form emen eerie ete ip icti ine tene peso ctio ttai esent 4 18 Creating a new part program ssssssssssssssssseeenee nete teneee eterne 19 45 Entering Tool Related Data ecce 4 21 l Feednita A AE E ET Spindle speed S 5 sci eteeni pede reae a aanak A 4 6 Entering Miscellaneous Functions and Program Stop 4 23 4 7 Actual Position Capture PRERE bes oU ain a 4 24 4 8 Marking Blocks for Optional Block Skip 4 25 49 Text Files 11 cese eee eren mE 4 26 Finding text SECTIONS i ecc eh etat Ue e asta ere KSAN d e eaire 4 28 Erasing and inserting characters words and lines essssssssssseeeesees 4729 Editing text DIOCKS i dan a estie Ee NUR ert eere rne te age re reme F
132. compensation feed rate miscellaneous function The tool moves in a straight line from its current position to the end point The starting position is approached in the preceding block Fig 5 16 Linear movement To program a straight line Straight line with rapid traverse If necessary Specify as relative coordinate for exampie G91 X 50 mm ag xX Select the axis orange colored axis key for example X O Enter the coordinates of the end point If necessary For negative coordinates press the key once e g X 50 mm Enter all further coordinates of the end point 5 10 l TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates The TNC moves the tool with radius compensation left of the programmed contour The TNC moves the tool with radius compensation right of the programmed contour Resulting NC block N25 G00 G42 G91 X 50 G90 Y 10 Z 20 M3 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 11 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Example for exercise Milling a rectangle Coordinates of the corner points X 5mm X 5mm X 95 mm X 95 mm Milling depth Z z 10mm Part program 9685121 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 7 20 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y4100 Z 0 esses N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 5 N40 T1 G17 S2500 N60 X 10 Y 10 N70 2 10 MOS Miu EE iie iosiismetiticini mia N90 Y 95 N140 24100 M02 N99999 9685121
133. corner rounding radius e DIRECTION OF ROTATION Q9 Direction of rotation for pockets Clockwise Q9 1 up cut milling for pocket and island Counterclockwise Q9 1 climb milling for pocket and island Activation Fig 8 36 Direction of rotation Q9 and G120 becomes effective immediately upon definition stepover factor k The machining parameters can be checked during a program interruption and overwritten if required If the SL cycles are used in Q parameter programs the cycle parameters Q1 to Q14 cannot be used as program parameters Fig 8 37 Distance and infeed parameters ep a 830 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group il PILOT DRILLING G121 Application Cycle G121 is for PILOT DRILLING of the cutter infeed points It accounts for the ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE and the ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR as weil as the radius of the rough out tool The cutter infeed points also serve as starting points for milling I Sequence Same as cycle G83 PECKING Input data PECKING DEPTH O10 Dimension by which the tool drills in each infeed negative sign for negative direction FEED RATE FOR PECKING O11 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during drilling ROUGH MILL Q13 Toot number of the roughing mill Fig 8 38 Possible infeed point for PILOT DRILLING i M U i Ke a ri TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 31 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group Il ROUGH OUT G122 Sequence e The co
134. cycle state that the contour elements are described in subprograms 2 and 1 N60 G57 P01 2 P02 15 P03 8 P04 100 P05 0 POG TO POZ SOO vestes er epe toad Cycle definition ROUGH OUT N70 G00 G40 G90 24100 MO6 Retract in the infeed axis insert tool N80 X 40 Y 50 MOS oriniai ens Pre position in X Y spindle ON N90 Z 2 M99 seseseeeeeeeeeehee teet etn tetra aste na sa Pre position in Z to setup clearance cycle call N100 Z 100 M02 N110 G98 L1 Subprogram 1 N120 G01 G42 X 40 Y 60 Geometry of the island N130 X 15 radius compensation G42 and machining in counterclockwise direction the contour element is an island N150 Y 20 N160 G25 R12 N170 X 70 N180 G25 R12 N190 Y 60 N200 G25 R12 N210 X 40 N220 G98 LO N230 G98 L2 Subprogram 2 N240 G01 G47 X 5 Y 5 Geometry of the auxiliary pocket N250 X 105 External boundary of the area to N260 Y 105 be machined N270 X 5 radius compensation G41 and machining in counterclockwise N280 Y 5 direction the contour element is a pocket N290 G98 LO N99999 9 6S818l G71 8 18 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Overlapping contours Pockets and islands can also be overlapped to form a new contour The area of a pocket can thus be enlarged by another pocket or reduced by an island Starting position Machining begins at the starting position of t
135. d Status Displays Repeating graphic simulation A part program can be graphically simulated as often as desired either with the complete workpiece blank or with a detail of it Restore workpiece blank as it was last shown e Show the complete BLK FORM as it appeared WINDOW before a detail was magnified via TRANSFER BLK DETAIL FORM di The WINDOW BLK FORM sott key wil retum athe biank form to its original shape and size even ifa detail I has been isolated and not yet magnified with TRANSFER DETAIL Measuring the machining time 3815 S7 At the lower right of the graphics window the TNC N10 DOG Qr Pai D e shows the calculated machining time in fed Dee Gr Per se e N38 088 Q3 PO1 39 e is N35 OG QG Pai 40 e hours minutes seconds N36 DOG O16 PO 10 e maximum 99 59 59 N amp Q DOG Pat 90 e N59 090 Q1 PQ1 90 e e Program run NODI E Pat ae The clock counts and displays the time from rco bna program start to program end The clock stops N90 022 aia PO 50 e whenever machining is interrupted N100 Dea 0 2 Pui B e Ni110 Nae DA Q5 PO G e Test run N20 000 G70 POL 6e e MAL The clock shows the time which the TNC STE pales Poor caiculates for the duration of tool movements suero faeron ru Fig 1 29 The calculated machining time is shown at the lower right of the workpiece graphic To activate the stopwatch function RESET a Press the shift keys until the soft key row with the
136. d holes N320 DOS Q10 P02 Q3 POS 99 oo Finished N330 G98 L2 N340 G10 G40 G90 R O4 H Q11 M99 Drill second hole and further holes N350 D01 Q10 PO1 O10 PO2 1 sees Count finished holes N360 D01 Q11 POT Q11 PO2 Q6 Calculate angle for next hole N370 D12 P01 Q10 P02 Q3 P032 oo eee Not finished N380 G98 L99 N390 GOO Z 200 sess Hetract in Z NAGO GOB a CM End of subprogram N99999 96 LOCHKR G71 M a eaa 7 24 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 9 Programming Examples Ellipse X coordinate calculation X a cos a Y coordinate calculation Y b sin a a b Semimajor and semiminor axes of the ellipse X Angle between the leading axis and the connecting line from P to the center of the ellipse X Y Center of the ellipse The points of the ellipse are calculated and connected by many short lines The more points that are calculated and the shorter the lines connecting them the smoother the curve becomes The machining direction can be altered by changing the entries for the starting angle and end angle The input parameters are listed below in blocks N10 to N120 Caiculations are programmed with the FORMULA function Part program Ellipse G71 Load data N10 DOO Q1 POT 50 oo le eeseeessterssereeeeee X COOrdinate for center of ellipse N20 DOO Q2 P01 50
137. de Active interface FE1 FE2 ME EXT1 EXT2 RS 232 or RS 422 indicated file type OPERATION TNC RS2324FE1 9153 FRESADOR TABI To select external data transfer The screen is divided into two halves MDI H 10 H 1111 K 115 oH M n d Mon on a G Files in i23 K Files if any in external the TNC 123456 H storage device 209 oH 22742682 oH 300 oH 3500 3501 1 5 FILES 150016 BYTES VACANT 38 FILE S 680 SECTORS VACANTT TRANSFER TRANSFER TRANSFER SELECT UINDOU 7 aeaee m esum ere ul tf you select the data transfer function from a tool table or pocket table only the functions TRANSFER TRANSFER s oy n2 rn En are available 92 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 External Data Transfer 9 2 Selecting and Transferring Files The data transfer functions are provided in a soft key row Soft key row in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation PAGE TRANSFER TRANSFER TRRNSFER SELECT WINDOW f pio x s 2 TNC EXT TNC EXT TVPE Selecting files Use the arrow keys to select the desired file The PAGE soft keys are for scrolling up and down in the file directory The SELECT TYPE soft key has the same function as described earlier see page 1 27 Renaming files Use the soft key RENAME see page 1 31 to rename files in the TNC for example when there is already a file in the external device with the same name i Tr
138. de ates Inhibit datum setting for Z axis Inhibit datum setting for axis IV Inhibit datum setting for axis V MP 7296 Function Set datum only with soft key Set datum with soft key or with orange axis key mc c Ic c H J 11 10 i TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters Erase the status display O parameters and tool data after program run The status display and the Q parameters can be erased at the end of the program with a PGM END block M2 or M30 MP 7300 Function Erase status display Q parameters and tool data when a program is Selected ss Erase status display Q parameters and tool data with M02 M30 END PGM and when a program is selected Erase status display and tool data when a program is selected ss ees Erase status display and tool data when a program is selected and with M02 M30 and END PGM Erase status display and Q parameters when a program is selected Erase status display Q parameters and tool data with M02 M30 END PGM and when a program is selected Erase status display when a program is selected ou ccs cccsesssssescscsssscsesscsevecsessesesesscecaeasestarssassassussecesesees Erase status display with M02 M30 END PGM and when a program is selected Graphic display mode Input value 0 to 15 sum of values in the Value column MP 7310 Function Cases Projection in thre
139. des more information on TIMET Maximum tool life in minutes during TOOL CALL If the current tool life exceeds this value the TNC changes the tool during the next TOOL CALL see aiso CUR TIME MAX TOOL LIFE FOR TOOL CALL Time in minutes that the tool has been in use The TNC automatically counts the current toot life A starting value can be entered for used tools Comment on tool up to 16 characters TOOL DESCRIPTION CURRENT TOOL LIFE Information in tool tables TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 11 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Pocket table for tool changer 4 12 The TOOL_P tabie for tool pocket is programmed in a program run operating mode The soft key NEW POCKET TABLE or also the RESET POCKET TABLE is for erasing an existing pocket table and writing a new one Like the tool table a pocket table can also be read in EDIT TOOL TRBLE M ME POCKET LOCKED YES SENT NO NOENT 711919811 711910001 700080000 211011001 00900000 11010011 and read out directly through the data interface see page 4 10 12 7 58 Y 2 1805 008 U W 230 987 Be M 5 9 1 uo BEGIN END mE RESET s NEXT Too TABLE TRBLE 9 TABLE Urr AN LINE TRBLE Fig 4 7 Pocket table for the tool changer 5 378 45 801 To select the pocket table Select too table Select pocket table POCKET TABLE EDIT Set the EDIT soft key to ON GFF
140. direction of rotation is used Input Fig 5 25 Circular path from to E around I J End point of the arc Fora full circle the end point in the GO2 G03 block should be the same as the starting point of the contour I J OO X Fig 5 26 Fuli circle around i J with a Fig 5 27 Coordinates of an arc G02 block HENCE Rede ee Rr rn 5 18 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates To program a circular are with G02 around a circle center I J direction of rotation clockwise Circle in Cartesian coordinates clockwise Enter the first coordinate of the end point in incremental dimensions for example X 5 mm Enter the second coordinate of the end point in absolute dimensions for example Y 5 mm Conclude the block Further entries if necessary Radius compensation e Feed rate Miscellaneous function Resulting NC block G02 G91 X 5 G90 Y 5 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 19 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Exercise Mill a fuil circle with one block Circle center Beginning and end of the arc Milling depth Tool radius Part program Begin the program Workpiece blank MIN point Workpiece blank MAX point Define the tool N40 T6 G17 S1500 Call the tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MOG Retract and insert too N60 X450 Y 40 Pre position in the working piane N70 Z 5
141. e Remove the cause of the error Start again If you cannot correct the error Write down the error message and contact your repair service agency TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 2 Program Run Mid program startup With the RESTORE POS AT N feature block scan you can start a part program at any desired biock The TNC scans the program blocks up to that point Machining can be graphically simulated Af a part program has been interrupted with an INTERNAL STOP the TNC automatically offers the interrupted block N for mid program startup at The RESTORE POS AT N feature must be enabled by the machine tool builder Mic program startup must not begin in a subprogram Ali necessary programs tables and pallet fi fi les must be selected in a program run mode of operation T e if the part program contains a progr mmed interruption before the startup block the block scan is interrupted Press the machine START button to continue the block scan After a block scan return the tool to Hin calculated position with RESTORE POSITION RESTORE POS RT WS 11 velt Sine a START UP AT RN D o LP g START UP AT N UEM PROGRAM b s 132 6 REPETITIONS gt x nm 1RA F Enter the block number N at which the block scan shouid end Enter the name of the program containing the block N if block N is located in a program section repetition enter the number of repet
142. e You want to jump to program 100 H as soon as Q5 becomes negative N5 DOO Q5 POT 10 esent teneras Assign a value such as 10 to parameter Q5 D02 Q5 P01 Q5 P02 12 Reduce the value of Q5 N10 D12 P01 O5 P02 0 PO3 5 ees If 05 lt 0 jump to label 5 15 G98 L5 esent Label 5 16 96 100 H eus Jump to program 100 H TOREM HM 7 12 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 y Programming with Q Parameters 7 5 Checking and Changing Q Parameters During a program run or program test Q parameters can be checked and changed if necessary Preparation if you are in a program run interrupt it for example by pressing the machine STOP key and the INTERNAL STOP soft key If you are doing a test run interrupt it To cali the Q parameter TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 13 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 6 Diverse Functions Select the diverse functions to call the following options D14 D15 Dis ERROR PRINT PLC Displaying error messages D14 ERROR With the function D14 ERROR you can call messages that were pre programmed by the machine tool builder If the TNC encounters a block with D14 during a program run or test run it will interrupt the run and display an error message The program must then be restarted Input Example D14 P01 254 The TNC then displays the test stored under error number 254 Error number to be entered Prepared di
143. e Fixed Cycles i scicccicssccsisssessessvoscasaraoesncsessiecseonnssoisn E Om PECKING G83 pore EE ehe Rc Ea detente i ee Eel ee EY TAPPING with floating tap holder G84 RiGid tapping G8b i ui etes stereo este ed AA aS THREAD CUTTING BO re usce ecrit eio too Rates e A ANA E as aerae na exi tiw SLOT MIBEING 1G74 X t eo eR HE eerte ined POCKET MILLING G75 G76 CIRCULAR POCKET MILLING G77 G78 cse netntetneenn 813 SL Cycles Group PPM EO E CONTOUR GEOMETRY G37 ends 8 16 ROUGH OUT Gb7 1 5 oeste cott clatter scien Eee a eet ER e etas een eh denned 8 17 Overlapping COITEOUIS i caeci pere oriente eto pe Fe Rer Ea Dane a ava edere Oran eee Da aa ah 8 19 PILOT DRILLING G56 seen 825 CONTOUR MILLING G58 G59 essent teeneeeneeneeeees GHZO SL Cycles Group Il esee inane nne rn enne nnne e ane B 29 CONTOUR DATA G120 rnnr n e a OOOO PILOT DRILLING G121 sse amp 31 ROUGH OUT G122 rrr rette Lect ocean erbe est east nb dao dear aane aa OO FLOOR FINISHING G123 eres eei eese entente ren tnt ttam tntme tenete than 832 SIDE FINISHING G124 sse CONTOUR TRAIN G125 Coordinate Transformations eceeeeee eese e ee eanene sees ases ssasesa OPP DATUM SHIFT G54 DATUM SHIFT with datum tables G53 MIRROR IMAGE G28 DESNA E tee xia nove devon M
144. e beige p tee eciam 4 10 Creating Pallet Files Tct T 4 32 4 11 Adding Comments to the Program PEER Ferias aaiae 4 34 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 1 General Information on Programming Tool Movements 5 2 5 2 Contour Approach and Departure sess 5 4 Starting point and end POINT eee ceececceeceesceeenceeeeeceeceeeececeseeecsesesecsesceecssesanseeeesseners 5 4 Tangential approach and departure esses esee tement eaten 5 6 5 3 Path Functions ousoo boim aroser naaran eenaa iadaaa anaa iara ebda ane 5 7 General information aieeaii en en a a a aaa ren E AE a 57 Machine axis movement under program control oo eee e sse tater eene nnn 5 7 Overview of path functions esee ee trennen t nett rta m estate tnn nen metere nne ne 5 9 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates sss 5 10 GOO Straight line with rapid traverse nennen eene tenen 5 10 G01 Straight line with feed rate F 1 D710 G24 Charters esci t oio pec ceste A E NEA EERE D ded Girel s and circular arcs eet terere ee e T denies eee ane 5 15 Girele Center ld EE E teet E A E thoes RE e Re PH eR Se SEE S hades saan 5 16 G02 G03 GO05 Circular path around I J K ccc ccc sss 5 18 G02 G03 G05 Circular path with defined radius esssssseee 5 21 G06 Circular path with tangential connection o
145. e block with a slash Blocks containing tool definition 699 cannot b 4 25 4 Programming 49 Text Files You can use the TNC s text editor to write and edit texts Typical applications Recording test results Documenting working procedures Keeping formulas and creating cutting data diagrams The text editor can edit only type A files text files If you wish to edit other types of files with the text editor you must first convert them see page 1 31 The typewriter style keyboard provides letters symbols and function keys e g backspace that you need to create and change texts The soft keys enable you to move around in the text and to find delete copy and insert letters words sections of text text blocks or entire files To create a text file Show text files type A files Enter a file name for example ABC and confirm The following information is visible in the high PROGRRMMING RNB EDITING x 2 n SINGLE BLOCK lighted line at the top of the text window e FILE Name of the current text file THIS 1S R TEXT FILE LINE Line in which the cursor is np be iD presently located COLUMN Column in which the cursor is RECORD T ST RESULTS presently located DOCUMENT WORKING PROCEDURES NSERT insert new text pushing the STORE FORMULAS AND TABLES existing text to the right ERES OVERWRITE Write over the existing text Nene PRCRENEIPRERNETORS erasing it where it i
146. e into the individual part program in a G99 block or e once for each tool into a Common too table that is stored as a type T file Once a tool is defined the TNC associates its dimensions with the too number and accounts for them when executing positioning blocks The way the tool is used is influenced by several miscellaneous functions see page 11 16 Setting the tool data Too numbers Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 254 When the tool data are entered into the program too number 0 is auto matically defined as having length L 0 and radius R 0 in tool tables also tool 0 should be defined with L 0 and R 0 Tool radius R The radius of the tool is entered directly Tool length L The compensation value for the tool length is measured as the difference in length between the tool and a zero tool or with a tooi pre setter A too pre setter eliminates the need to define a tool in terms of the difference between its length and that of another tool TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 42 Tools 44 Oversizes for lengths and radii deita values In tool tables you can enter so called deita values for tool length and radius Positive delta values tool oversize Negative delta values tool undersize Application Undersize in the tool table for wear Delta values can be numerical values or 0 The maximum permissible oversize or undersize is j 99 999 mm De
147. e planes Projection method 1 eese rte according to SO 6433 Projection method 2 sse Rotate coordinate system by 90 ROC TRE DO NOt TOtate Jede UE Shift the new BLK FORM with cycle 7 DATUM SHIFT see page 8 Show cursor position during SHOW s a ed dieser itte oe e eoo ata dot ut ad projection in 3 planes mode Do not show Graphic simulation without programmed tool axis Enter any realistic value Parameter Function MP 7315 lere coll ce CE MP 7316 Penetration depth from upper surface of blank form MP 7317 0 M function for starting graphic simulation MP 7317 1 M function for ending graphic simulation esee TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 I 11 11 1 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters Parameters for machining and program run Oriented spindle stop with cycle G85 MP 7160 Function e Spindle orientation at beginning of cycle G85 ee cee ccc eeee sec cesceeeseesssssesnaecenseseeeeeeeessasstensacerens No spindle orientation at beginning of cycle G85 Size of NC memory for blockwise transfer MP 7228 Function e MP 7228 0 Minimum memory range sectors e MP 7228 1 Maximum memory range sectors eeesssseeseeseesee ee eenenentttntnmate n nnne nee trt One sector is approximately 1 kilobyte Effect of cycle G72 SCALING FACTOR MP 7410 Function SCALING effective in 3 axes e SCALING effective in the working plane se
148. eating subprograms esee isses eese enne tsitntnn teas tart sten a ains iiaiai itna 6 12 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 1 Part Families Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values 7 4 7 2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions 7 7 T JOVeINIEW uec uter Deni rc NOE m oe ar Lr EU St Lad 7 7 7 3 Trigonometric Functions csssssssscssscssssssscensstesascorseessesensares 7 10 RU AL E E EEE S EEEE E bh eek 7 10 7 4 WH Then Decisions with Q Parameters 0 0 cssececcesesesessscecooes 7 11 JUImps 55 E Precio ei eta giai perdre Deseo et iesu eti ede exe esee sp cele erg Cada eain i aee de accede 7 11 o Sau REED CET 7 11 7 5 Checking and Changing Q Parameters eese 7 13 7 6 Diverse Functions ccccccccssessstcereseersecscessnsncnsasreseneseascnsauess 7 14 Displaying error messages sssssssssseseeeeeeee ues ssssaeescsessestetesessesseeeseesaceeeseeeeeees 7 14 Output through an external data interface sessi antenne 7 15 Transfer to the PLC c mene te Taceo acte oec cie a cu dgstalec ctetur ete vadyass AO 7 7 Entering Formulas Directly cceccsseesessensnseseeseeneseacnennens 7 16 Overview of functions 20 0 ecccccesecscsscceseecsecssesseracenaceesscssesesstesesceeaesaecesneeesguacesetevenavess 7 16 7 8 Measuring with the 3D Touch Probe During
149. edt eere eee Pase Pe sons EA AE exeo t Qe TTS 11 33 Parameter definitions cccccccccsssceccesseececececececessescesscesccsscuceerescececsteracetstsanertereees 1 35 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 The TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 ccessscsescseeensesecenseeee 1 2 KEY DOSIGS RM MC 1 4 Visual display Unit eminet Eee henselae ca coste risa e Dae ee araoa TaN E Fiia peri ea tastes ceeded 1 5 WING VACCOSSONES 2 yA tid Aredia lor eet e ce ER eai cd das 1 8 Fundamentals of Numerical Control NC 1 9 Introduetion a fos ce Me been ee deese ead deep Ad eR AED EE cae Sen eade io 1 9 n cigar erc PM TE T EEE EA 1 9 The part program esee e eo ee eR ORE EM age va Eco E TEN NH ELE 1 9 Conversational programming esses eseeenee sienne eatth ess sne senten sinn s st smas rera atn 1 9 Reterence SyStelmi 1 cesi meet reed e Ere eee oe eae yo ee Eee pede dno ede aaea e tee doses 1 10 Cartesian coordinate SYSTtern nee este o pepe deett addu oet oaa e ege dea 1 10 Additional axes iu sse cte reser rti eet ee Pra S So pepe de EEA EE eNA E a eseas 1 11 Polar coordinates 5 cri totae tees yre id dae ee ius Vio Subse bina SS RARE EEVE TRES Red 1 11 D tutnsettmg oie diei Es e nde op EE Ree ende du viet Mad xe EVER ES 1 12 Absolute workpiece positions 0 0 eee ceceeseeneceecnncerseecenesecnecnsseseaeresacnensaaepanereensa
150. eed point the contro advances the tool to the next pecking depth This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached The remaining subcontours are milled in the same manner Required tool The cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 Fig 8 30 Infeeds and distances for Direction of rotation during contour milling CONTOUR MILLING Clockwise G58 e For M3 up cut milling for pocket and island Counterclockwise G59 e For M3 climb milling for pocket and island input data e SETUP CLEARANCE e MILLING DEPTH The algebraic sign determines the working direction negative sign means negative working direction PECKING DEPTH e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Traversing speed of the tool during penetration e FEED RATE Traversing speed of the too in the machining plane Fig 8 31 Finishing allowance a a AA 8 26 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group I The following scheme illustrates the application of the cycles PILOT DRILLING ROUGH OUT and CONTOUR MILLING in part programming 1 List of contour subprograms G37 No call 2 Drilling Define and call the drilling too G56 Pre positioning Cycle call 3 Rough out Define and call rough milling tool G57 Pre positioning Cycle call 4 Finishing Define and call finish milling tool G58 G59 Pre positioning Cycle cali 5 Contour subprograms MO2 Sub
151. eee esent hne nennen enne 11 5 Parameters for TNC displays and the editor sese 11 6 Parameters for machining and program run ssssssssseeseeeeneennen 11 12 Parameters for the electronic handwheel sse 11 15 Miscellaneous Functions M functions 11 17 Miscellaneous functions with predetermined effect sse 11 17 Vacant miscellaneous functions eesssssissssssseseeee eene eene nnemna sitne nennen 11 18 Pre assigned Q Parameters ccscsssessssstseersnesesseesnteeenenenerees 11 19 Diagrams for Machining gael cue nd E AAE 11 21 Spindle speed S in ede enr seagulls db Ine e ete eine ies I ias 11 21 F ed rat P eus geste pU IE OE des ura eere nio REN Saee ont cata cus sds YEAR gener 11 22 Feed rate F for tapping o deter ttd uec ee tee eee eee oca eei e aaroo dai 11 23 Features Specifications and Accessories 11 24 Programmable Functions esses eee nennen ttem nennen 11 25 BGCESSOMES ieri cetera co iier cete pv chem desee A E Sede ied esee eee ee Ie eeu 11 27 TNC Error Messages pn UON 11 28 TNC error messages during programming EAR ie eas E AAE E E TNC error messages during test run and program r run M i Address Letters ISO cec eceeeeee essere enean 11 33 G f nCtioniS x seeeee EE tim er
152. eeeeeseeees Rotation for program start starting plane angle N270 1 0 J 0 N280 G11 R Q24 H4Q6 FO11 esu Pre positioning before machining N290 G98 L1 N300 140108 K 0 occ cccccccsesscssnsenseseesseenseeeraeeees Set pole X Z plane N310 G01 Y 0 Z 0 FQ11 sees Pre positioning at each arc beginning N320 G98 L2 N330 G11 R Q4 H O21 FO11 N340 D02 Q21 PO1 021 PO2 O3 oo Mill the sphere upward until the highest point is reached N350 D11 P01 021 P02 02 P03 2 N360 G11 R Q4 H Q2 nennen eani Mill the highest point on the sphere N370 GO0 Z QTB cosdaenesc d tero Un Retract in Z N3809CFO2D4 T osuere rete ope ears Retract in X N390 D01 Q26 P01 026 P02 08 seus Prepare the next rotation increment N400 DOO Q21 P0O1 Q1 emeret RESET solid angle for machining to the starting value N410 G73 G90 H 026 eee ACtivate rotation for next operation N420 D12 P01 026 P02 07 P03 1 N430 D09 P01 026 P02 07 P03 1 oe Rotate the coordinate system around the Z axis until the end plane angle is reached N440 G73 G90 H40 eese RESET rotation N450 G54 X 0 YO Z0 essent Reset data shift VP ge ado C End of subprogram N99999 9657121 G71 7 28 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 8 Cycles 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 General Overview bcd EEA DTE eva presa aospes desee CV DL DV e Qua A OR 8 2 Programming a cycle sesssss sendin eZ Dimensions in the tool axis Simpl
153. ellaneous M Functions Vacant miscellaneous functions The vacant miscellaneous functions are used by the machine tool builder for machine specific functions You will find a description of these func tions in the operating manual for your machine tool Effect of vacant miscellaneous functions Effective at Effective at start of iend of start of end of block block block block 11 18 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 3 Preassigned Q Parameters TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Q100 to Q113 are assigned vaiues by the TNC These values include Values from the PLC Too and spindle data Data on operating status etc Vaiues from the PLC Q100 to Q107 The TNC uses Q100 to Q107 to transfer values from the PLC to an NC program Tool radius Q108 The current value of the tool radius is assigned to Q108 Tool axis Q109 The value of Q109 depends on the current tool axis Tool axis Parameter value No tool axis defined Z axis Y axis X axis Qao nw u tl Spindle status Q110 The value of Q110 depends on which M function was last programmed M function Parameter value No spindle status defined MOS Spindle ON clockwise M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise MOS after M03 MO5 after M04 Coolant on off 0111 Parameter value MO8 Coolant on Q111 1 MO9 Coolant off Q111 0 11 19 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 3 Preassigned Q
154. en two contour elements Select the corner rounding function tM QA ee BS Enter the rounding radius for example R 10 mm Enter the feed rate for corner rounding for exampie F 100 mm min Resulting NC block G25 R 10 F 100 re a a 5 26 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Example for exercise Rounding a corner Coordinates of the corner point Rounding radius Milting depth Tool radius Part program S527 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 sss N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T7 L 0 R 10 N40 T7 G17 1500 N50 G00 G40 G90 Z 100 MOE N60 X 10 Y 5 oe N70 2 15 MOS N80 G01 G42 X 0 Y 5 F100 N90 X 95 N10O G25 R20 esee terree se tpe nooeitoc tone N110 Y 100 N120 GOO G40 X120 Y4120 sess N130 Z 100 MQ2 eene ettet teet nnt tothcho N99999 S527 G71 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Begin the program Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract and insert tool Pre position in the working plane Move the tool to working depth Approach the contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate First straight line for the corner Insert a tangential arc with radius R 20 mm between the contour elements Second straight line for the corner Depart the contour cancel radius compensation Retract in the infeed axis 5 27 5 Programming Tool Movement
155. eneesenseseesteseasneesseeeereseneeeeges 1 14 Programming tool movements o eceecceeesseceeceeeteseenaeessersssneesessecessecsenenqeseesesseteeaeeeees 1 17 Postio encoder aoaea ee a eve Eee TER ege aee ede aas eios 1 17 Reference aT i AAA E AS N EA T Wieeseameeacdelus 1 17 Switcb On sui E E E errr 1 18 Graphics and Status Displays eese 1 19 Graphics during program FUN usiueeiee irte inerte thao enne inot anness esra cae 1 19 Plan VIEW eot edocet eerie aci esee ODE de i MR eee es 1 20 Proiecti n In 3 planes sduesa i yeaa ieia e E rE Eiana iae PE Eee eret rai iaaa 1 21 Cursor position during projection in 3 planes 00 ee ees ceseeeeeeeeeestaeenseseceeeeneteetseas 1 22 KIDR CIE p 1 22 Magnifying details eoe eene etel ege eer tetanic e e Repeating graphic SIMULATION eect ccetceeterneceneeceecearsaaeraneensessasensesseaestsensseeees 1 25 Measuring the machining time 0 2 0 0 sess eene enne ene n eene FOO Status displays ees ere d cte eespo onte ge e eee REY eee ssacetneracvesegestevesneevesextersneders 1 26 Additional status displays 00 0 0 ccecssceccseseeseeceeecaeeeesecereesereseecensreaeessueaeeeasenneaaoes Pees 1 26 POS E E E E E A T ET 1 29 File directory eeeesssssss P sedes deed eoi in Le Marise Bini ea ER dE aq eee lere t 1 29 File Status 5 5 O N edt ces e rap rr eee Res e a okie dees CIS E edat Ra Debe yee eaa carsaed tS 1 30 Selecting a file ios eDim ri E e ee cda detta i
156. entional machine tool the machine slide moves in direct relation to the rotation of the handwheel wide range of traverses per handwhee revolution is available Portable handwheels such as the HR 330 are connected via cabie to the TNC Integral hand wheels such as the HR 130 are built into the machine control panel An adapter permits connec tion of up to three handwheeis Your machine manufacturer can tell you more about the handwheel configuration of your machine Fig 1 8 The HR 330 Electronic Handwheel ENNNNN i t n LE 1 8 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of Numerical Control NC Introduction This chapter discusses the following topics What is NC The part program Programming Reference system Cartesian coordinate system Additional axes Polar coordinates Setting the pole Datum setting Absolute workpiece positions Incremental workpiece positions Programming tool movements Position encoders Reference marks What is NC NC stands for Numerical Control that is the operation of a machine tool by a series of coded instructions comprised of numbers Modern controls such as the TNC have a built in computer for this purpose and are there fore called CNC Computerized Numerical Control The part program The part program is a complete list of instructions for machining a part It contains such information as the target position of a tool movemen
157. erence pole for polar coordinates Fig 5 20 Circle center coordinates Direction of rotation When a circular path has no tangential transition to another contour element enter the mathematical direction of rotation Clockwise direction of rotation is mathematically negative G02 e Counterclockwise direction of rotation is mathematically positive GO3 Fig 5 21 Direction of rotation for circular rnovement TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 15 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Radius compensation in circular paths You cannot begin radius compensation in a circle block it must be activated beforehand in a line block Circles in the main planes When you program a circle the TNC assigns it to Spindle axis Main plane Circle center one of the main planes This plane is automatically defined when you set the spindle axis during a tool call 1 Fig 5 22 Defining the spindle axis also defines the main plane uly You can program circles that do not lie paraliel to a main plane by using Q parameters see chapter 7 Circle center I J K For arcs programmed with G02 G03 G05 it is necessary to define the circle center This is done in the following ways Entering the Cartesian coordinates of the circle center Using the circle center defined in an earlier block Capturing the actual position If G29 is programmed the last programmed position is automatically
158. erviews and Diagrams 11 6 TNC Error Messages The TNC automatically generates error messages when it detects prob lems such as incorrect data input Logical errors in the program Contour elements that are impossible to machine incorrect use of the touch probe system An error message containing a program block number was caused by an error in the indicated block or in the preceding block To clear a TNC error message first correct the error and then press the CE key Some of the more frequent TNC error messages are explained in the following list TNC error messages during programming 11 28 ENTRY VALUE INCORRECT Enter a correct LBL number Note the input limits EXT IN OUTPUT NOT READY Connect the external device properly FURTHER PROGRAM ENTRY IMPOSSIBLE Erase some oid files to make room for new ones JUMP TO LABEL 0 NOT PERMITTED Do not program CALL LBL 0 A given label number can only be entered once in a program TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams TNC error messages during test run and program run ANGLE REFERENCE MISSING Complete your definition of the arc and its end points f you enter polar coordinates define the polar coordinate angle correctly You have calculated with illegal values Detine values within the range limits Choose probe positions for the 3D touch probe that are farther apart Ali calculat
159. es curve milling or geometrical modules can be written as main programs and then called like fixed cycles Input data Enter the file name of the program to be called The program is called with G79 separate block or M99 blockwise or M89 modally Example Program cali A caliable program program 50 is to be called into a program via a cycle call CIS RENE Nga pen ee RE RT ee CES Part program 339P01 50 0c eH eere Program 50 is a cycle GOO G40 X420 Y 50 M99 sssssssssseeer een Call program 50 A a i aaam TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 47 8 Cycles 8 6 Other Cycles ORIENTED SPINDLE STOP G36 Application The control can address the machine tool spindle as a 6th axis and rotate it to a given angular position Oriented spindle stops are required for Tool changing systems with a defined tool change position Orientation of the transmitter receiver window of the HEIDENHAIN TS 511 3D touch probe system Activation The angle of orientation defined in the cycle is positioned to by entering M19 If M19 is executed without a cycle definition the machine tool spindle will be oriented to an angle which has been set in the machine parameters Fig 8 50 Oriented spindle stop att Apart trom cycle G36 oriented spir die Gps can also be programmed in the machine parameters ROT Prerequisite The machine must first be set up for this cycle Input data Angle of o
160. es basic rotation Datum setting Measuring lengths and workpiece positions angles radii circle centers Measurements during program run Digitizing 3D surfaces E Fi E 14 Fig 2 7 3D touch probe model TS 120 The TNC must be specially prepared by the machine tool builder for NS use of a3D touch probe df you ali t make measurements during program run ensure that the tool data tlength radius axis are taken sue em the calibrated data or from the desti OOF CAL block selection trough M MP 741 t oor mee 44 42 After you press the machine START button the touch probe begins executing the selected probing function The machine manufacturer sets the feed rate F at which the probe approaches the workpiece When the touch probe contacts the workpiece it transmits a signal to the TNC the coordinates of the probed position are stored Stops moving and returns to its starting position at rapid traverse If the stylus is not deflected within the distance defined in MP 6130 the TNC displays an error message To select the touch probe functions D gt MANUAL OPERATION or gt ELECTRONIC BANDWHEEL E Select the touch probe functions a RD rR eel CAL L CALR PROBING PROBING PROBING PROBING EN CX ROT Pes pL e END TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 r D 1 1 1 1 1 t H 1 1 e Vis Fig 2 8 Feed rates during probing 2 9 2 Manual
161. ese deren N10 G30 G17 X 0 Ya0 2 20 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 3 N40 G99 T2 L 0 R 2 5 N50 G99 T3 L 0 R 2 5 N60 G37 PO1 1 P022 N70 G120 Q1 15 Q2 1 03 41 O4 1 O5 40 Q62 2 Q7 50 Q82410 Q9 1 N80 L10 0 EE N90 T1 G17 S2500 N100 G121 Q10 10 Q112100 013 2 N110 G79 M3 N120 L10 0 N130 T2 G17 1500 N140 G122 Q10 10 Q11 100 012 500 N150 G79 M3 N160 L10 0 AC a nest N180 G123 Q11280 Q12 250 anaoa Cycle call Floor Finishing N190 G79 M3 N200 G124 Q9 1 Q10 5 O11 100 saa N220 GOO G40 Z 100 M2 N230 G98 E10 11 xin sedere oed N240 TO G17 N250 G00 G40 G90 Z 100 N260 X 20 Y 20 M6 N270 G98 LO N280 G98 L1 N290 G01 G42 X 10 Y 50 N300 Y 90 N310 X 90 N320 Y 10 N330 X410 N340 Y 50 N350 G98 LO N360 G98 L2 N370 G01 G41 X 35 Y 50 N380 1 50 J 50 N390 G02 X 35 Y 50 N400 G98 LO N99999 58351 G71 Start of program Define workpiece blank Define tools Cycle definition Contour Geometry Cycle definition Contour Data Call subprogram for tool change Cycle definition Pilot Drilling Cycle call Pilot Drilling Cail subprogram for tool change Cycle definition Rough Out Cycle call Rough Out Call subprogram for tool change Cycle definition Floor Finishing Cycle definition Side Finishing Cycle cail Side Finishing Subprogram for tool change Contour subprog
162. esneeseeeeesessas 8 48 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 External Data Transfer 9 1 Menu for External Data Transfer eee eee cerea nen nane 9 2 9 2 Selecting and Transferring Files eese 9 3 Selecting files doe eret lee ra vet be oS leas b ree E ida ed Renaming THES e PTN Cc E e Traristerring THES iue eerte re eit ett percet seteend A at estore tenda se tied Geo Blockwise transfer esee oit edocet seite cokas FR ecd AAST EN S REEI NEEE 9 4 9 3 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces 9 5 RS 422 N 11 Interface liiis eese e eeeea se ssaarn e laca s antera etta e tensa nass s saccis trs trt ss asinino 9 5 RS 422 V 11 riterface au oie erant iret e eite ene Pen ERES ee ea eae raa Eaa 9 6 9 4 Preparing the Devices for Data Transfer 9 7 HEIDENHAIN GeViGeS 12 ccanscceceeddevaatebecdsatseodecuesvevsegeder sss ecvuvesosseecdeeees bdsescseuecns 7 7 Non HEIDENHAIN devices wo ccc ecceeceseeseceeeeecessessececonenseeceseavarecausssutassssssscesesseseee A77 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions 10 1 Seiecting Changing and Exiting the MOD functions 10 3 10 2 Software Numbers and Option Numbers 10 3 103 Code Numbers tecti enti dene F Lnd cekntaauacdds tacts Cus Gn i00 RUE de iUE 10 4 10 4 Setting the External Data Interfaces
163. etaeececeneeennenacienstenennes 2G Selecting the touch probe functions essere teet rathn tente tat anss 2 9 Calibrating the 3D touch probe ooo ccc ccc cceseceeeceeccesesensesseesesssecceeseueeseecessceceeseeeess 2 10 Compensating workpiece MISAlIGNMENt ecceeseeecessessescesscscescensseceececessseenteeeees 2712 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe cccsssssssssccesers 2 14 Setting the datum in any AXIS 2 eee sss casscecccccsssenscevsecersuserseseentareesaes 2 14 Comer aS QatUlTic sido ops tte tas CL tates Scie D tO E EH OE 2 15 Circle c nter as datum rone neien neaei ve tuadeve ele vaddiets sisecess idea dasudehcivadeaslevssdaid 2 17 Setting datum points over holes eeeceeeeeeeceneeeessneeecaeeesaesecssecnscessnsecoeeeevsssesnaeeesees 2 19 Measuring with a 3D Touch Probe eeesseeeeeeses 2 20 Finding the coordinates of a position on an aligned workpiece sssess 2 20 Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working piane ees 2 20 Measuring workpiece dimensions cceeesceeeececeeeeceeceteesaeeesseescesenscssssersesssseseesses 272 T Measuring angles trt tte Er ies umi tede in eeu daanin oieta iia o Tilting the Working Plane not on TNC 407 2 24 Traversing reference points with tilted axes esesesseseeeeermeees OA Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system sss
164. first select the PROGRAMMING END EDITING mode of operation Call the program directory for external files PRGE PRGE TRANSFER TRANSFER TRANSFER SELECT WINDOW QUII A tf i TNC EXT TNC EXT TVPE Move the highlight to the right onto the external file WINDOW Select one window mode To erase a file on the FE 401B J Move the highiight to the unwanted file DELETE 8 Erase the file in the highlight To protect or unprotect a file on the FE 401B Switch to the next soft key row o TEE P E PRGE PRGE PROTECT UNPROTECT E E Bea Se jew To protect files use the PROTECT soft key To remove file protection use UNPROTECT The functions for setting and removing file protection are the same as for files stored in the TNC see page 1 32 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 ntroduction 1 5 Files To format a floppy disk in the FE 401B DO ue hh P MM M PRGE PRGE PROTECT UNPROTECT Select the formatting function To convert and transfer files The CONVERT soft key is only available if the selected file is in the memory of the TNC i e if it is displayed on the left side of the screen WINDOW CONVERT Rec va CONVERT Select the target file type e g A Convert the file and save it on the external data medium DESTINATIONFILE eg T Enter the new file name and start conversion with ENT T
165. for blockwise transfer a s e E 9 4 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 9 External Data Transfer 9 3 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces RS 232 C V 24 Interface HEIDENHAIN devices External unit HEIDENHAIN RS 232 C HEIDENHAIN X21 eg FE standard cable adapter block connecting cable TNC 3m max 17 m OG a mB CI I Id Nr 242 869 01 id Nr 239 758 01 Id Nr 239 760 GND Chassis RXD Receive Data TXD Transmit Data CTS Clear To Send RTS Request To Send DTR Data Terminal Ready GND Signal Ground OMAN OOPWNH OOn OO i O0 F2 o0 00 4o 01 I CO n2 o0 CO OAA WH DSR Data Set Ready Fig 9 2 Pin layout of the RS 232 C V 24 interface for HEIDENHAIN devices di The connector pin layout on the adapter block differs from that on the TNC logic unit X21 Non HEIDENHAIN devices The connector pin layout on a non HEIDENHAIN device may differ consid erably from that on a HEIDENHAIN device and depends on the unit and the type of data transfer TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC407 9 5 9 External Data Transfer 9 3 Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data interfaces RS 422 V 11 interface Only non HEIDENHAIN devices are connected to the RS 422 interface V 11 Adapter HEIDENHAIN unit Block connecting TNC e g PC cable max 1000 m rey d Id Nr id Nr 24981901 250 478 s gt gt GND Chassis R
166. for manual tilting regardless of whether the tilting function is active or not Position display in the tilted system The positions displayed in the status window NOML and ACTL are in the tilted coordinate system i M 2 24 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 7 Tilting the Working Plane not on TNC 407 Limitations on working with the tilting function The touch probe function BASIC ROTATION cannot be used PLC positioning determined by the machine tool builder is not possible When combining coordinate transformation cycles you can use a procedure such as the following to activate them 1 Activate datum shift 2 Activate tilting function 3 Activate rotation Use the reverse procedure for resetting The cycle that was last defined is reset first e g 1 Activate rotation 2 Activate tilting function 3 Reset datum shift MEE ree builder He can give yo more detailed info a 2 25 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 7 Tilting the Working Plane not on TNC 407 To activate manual tilting 3D ROT Select menu for manual tilting ES Select the tilt axis Enter the tilt angle for example 45 Set TILT WORKING PLANE to ACTIVE Terminate input A symbol for the tilted plane is shown in the status display whenever the TNC is moving the machines axes in the tilted piane
167. gical If Then decisions by comparing a Q parameter with another Q parameter or with a numerical value Jumps The jump target is specified by a label number in the decision block If the programmed condition is fulfilled the TNC continues the program at the specified label If it is not fulfilled it continues with the next block To jump to another program enter a program call with 96 see page 6 8 after the block with the target label Unconditional jumps An unconditional jump is programmed by entering a conditional jump whose condition is always true Example If 10 equais 10 go to label 1 DOS P01 10 P02 10 PO3 1 Select the jump function to display the following options D9 IF EQUAL JUMP Example D09 P01 O1 P02 03 P03 5 if the two values or parameters are equal jump to the given label D10 IF NOT EQUAL JUMP Example D10 P01 10 P02 O5 P03 10 If the two values or parameters are not equal jump to the given label D11 IF GREATER THAN JUMP Example D11 P01 Q1 P02 10 P03 5 If the first value or parameter is greater than the second value or parameter jump to the given label D12 IF LESS THAN JUMP Example D12 P01 05 P02 0 PO3 1 If the first value or parameter is less than the second value or parameter jump to the given label TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 11 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 4 if Then Decisions with Q Parameters Jump exampl
168. go to label number 02 Subtraction 10 If not equal go to label number 03 Multiplication 11 If greater than go to label number 04 Division 12 If less than go to label number 05 Square root 13 Angle from c sin and c cos amp 06 Sine 14 Error number 07 Cosine 15 Print 19 Assignment PLC Add Function Start of program N Block number Program call with G39 P Cycle parameter A Rotary motion about X axis in fixed cycles B Rotary motion about Y axis P Value or Q parameter c Rotary motion about Z axis in Q parameter definition D Q parameter definitions Q Q parameter F Feed rate R Polar coordinate radius F Dwell time with GO4 R Circle radius with G02 G03 G05 F Scaling factor with G72 R Rounding radius with G25 G26 G27 G G functions R Tool radius with G99 H Polar coordinate angle S Spindle speed H Angle of rotation with G73 S Oriented spindle stop with G36 l X coordinate of the T Tool definition with G99 circle center pole T Tool call J Y coordinate of the T Next tool with G51 circle center pole K Z coordinate of the U Axis parallel to X axis circle center pole V Axis parallel to Y axis Ww Axis parallel to Z axis L Set a label number with G98 X X axis L Go to a label number Y Y axis L Tool length with G99 Z Z axis M M functions End of block Select the program number 234 G71 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 2 40 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 Program 234 in mm Define workpiece blank Tool definition G99 T1 L 0 R 5 Tool
169. gon Corner point coordinates Milling depth 10 mm Tool radius Part program 9655301 G71 1 reciente eite BEGIN program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 1 Define the workpiece blank N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R417 essent Define the tool N40 Ti G17 3200 esses Call the tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MOG ssssssssss Retract and insert tool N60 250 J KB Lue eut rerba tei rot tret tei Set pole N70 G10 R 70 H 190 sess Pre position in the working plane with polar Coordinates N80 2 10 MQS eerte Roni s Ue p Ree eene Move tool to working depth N90 G11 G41 R 45 H 180 F100 oo ee Move to contour point 1 N00 H7204 eset ote hr erede Move to contour point 2 NITO E60 55 oe eese eeu Ne bens Move to contour point 3 N120 G91 H 60 ooo etree Move to contour point 4 incremental dimensions N130 G90 H 60 iiis a secet NN Move to contour point 5 absolute dimensions N140 H 240 esee Mave to contour point 6 N150 H 5180 5 adeste reae tee eseset Move to contour point 1 N160 G10 G40 R 70 H 170 ssssssseeeen Depart contour cancel radius compensation N170 Z5100 MO2 c e te Eee tenerent Retract in the infeed axis N99999 S530 G71 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 E 5 29 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates G12 G13 G15 Circular path around pole J K The polar coordinate radius
170. gramming 4 3 Tool Compensation Values Movement without radius compensation G40 The tool center moves to the programmed coordi nates Applications e Drilling and boring Pre positioning Fig 4 10 These drilling positions are entered without radius compensation Tool movement with radius compensation G41 G42 The tooi center moves to the left G41 or right G42 of the programmed contour at a distance equal to the radius Left and right are to be understood as based on the direction of tool movement assuming a stationary workpiece Fig 4 11 The tool moves to the left G41 or right G42 of the path during milling at Beton two program blocks witi diti rent iA An y you must program at ica PY without radius compensation that is With G46 Radius compensation does not come into effect until the end e the Block in which it is first Programmed Shortening or lengthening single axis movements G43 G44 This type of radius compensation is only possible for single axis move ments in the working plane The programmed tool path is lengthened G43 or shortened G44 by the tool radius Applications Single axis machining Occasionally for pre positioning the tool such as for cycle G47 SLOT MILLING D Qe You ban enable GA9 and G44 by pr programminig g a positioning block with an axis akey a a S Na D The methine tool builder lt an set machine peremeters to inhiba
171. grams program section repeats are identified with labels Operating sequence The program is executed up to the end of the labelled program section end i e up to the block with Ln m Then the program section between the called label and the label call is repeated the number of times G98 L1 entered after under m i The program is then resumed after the last i repetition i L12 Programming notes o N99999 Foxe A program section can be repeated up to 65 534 times in succession e The total number of times the program section is Fig 6 2 Flow diagram for a program section repeat executed is always one more than the pro B return jump grammed number of repeats Programming and executing a program section repeat Mark the beginning Select the label setting function LABEL NUMBER Program section repeated starting at LABEL 7 for example Resulting NC block G98 L7 Specify the number of repeats Enter the number of repeats in the block that calls the label This is also the block that ends the program section B O The program section from LABEL 7 up to this block will be repeated ten times This means it will be run a total of eleven times Resulting NC block L7 10 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 5 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 2 Program Section Repeats Example for exercise Row of holes paraliel to the X axis
172. he TNC shows the coordinates of the cursor position at the bottom of the graphics window Oniy the coordinates of the working plane are shown This function is activated with mach ne parameter MP 7310 Cursor position during detail magnification During detail magnification the TNC dispiays the coordinates of the axis that is currently being moved x i Ee 1 RO fac T The coordinates describe the area determined for E oo Fig 1 25 The coordinates of the cursor position are dispiayed to the lower left of the graphic magnification To the ieft of the slash is the smallest coordinate of the detail in the current axis to the right is the largest 3D view Here the workpiece is displayed in three dimensions and can be rotated about the vertical axis The shape of the workpiece blank can be depicted by a frame over ay at the beginning of the graphic simulation in the TEST RUN mode of operation you can isolate details for magnification Bd TEX gt ismus Smet sme e STRTUS 1 al START GER a Fig 1 26 3D view 1 22 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays To rotate the 3D view RESET RREEEEEEEEERME TS ee e O S E n a STORE ADD psi psi SHQ OMIT pu O 00 00 00 00 ipee ud BLK FORM BLK FORM FORM D Rotate the workpiece in 27 steps about the vertical axis The current angular attitude of the disp
173. he first pocket listed in cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY The starting position should be located as far as possible from the superimposed contours Fig 8 16 Examples of overlapping contours Example Overlapping pockets The machining process starts with the first contour label defined in block 6 The first pocket must begin outside the second pocket Inside machining with a center cut end mill ISO 1641 tool radius 3 mm Coordinates of the circle centers Circle radii R 25mm Safety clearance Milling depth mm Pecking depth mm Feed rate for pecking mm min Finishing allowance Rough out angie Milling teed rate mm min Continued on next page e TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 19 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group I Cycle in a part program 9659201 G71 5 4e tre epireTrat ce cc edens Start of program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 sss Define workpiece blank N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R43 sesenta Define tool N40 T1 G17 82500 eese etna Call tool N50 G37 PO1 1 P02 2 sessi I the CONTOUR GEOMETRY cycie state that the contour elements are described in subprograms 1 and 2 N60 G57 P01 2 P02 15 P03 8 P04 100 P05 0 P0640 P07 500 7 oue ce tech eri vat Cycle definition ROUGH OUT N70 G00 G40 G90 2 100 MOB ou eee Retract in the infeed axis insert too N80 X450 Y 50 MO3 ses esses Preposition in X Y spindle ON NSO 242 M99 essere Preposition in Z to setup clearance
174. he next previous page of the table e Insert delete the last line in the table e Go to the beginning of the next line TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 33 4 Programming 4 11 Adding Comments to the Program Comments can be added to the part program in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation Applications Explanations of program steps e Adding general notes Adding comments to program biocks You can add comments to a program block immedi ately after entering the data by pressing the semicolon key on the alphabetic keyboard PROGRAMMING AND EDITING COMMENT 4 BLK FORM 2 X 100 Y 18 2 6 5 TOOL CALL 12 2 1886 DL 8 52 DR 8 85 6 CYCL DEF 9 86 DWELL TIME 7 CYCL DEF 9 1 DWELL 10 M 8 CYCL DEF 14 8 CONTOUR GEOM S 1 1 Input e Enter your comment and conclude the block by pressing the END key CYCL DEF 14 1 CONTOUR LABEL 1 CYCL DEF 8 8 ROUSH OUT 1 CYCL DEF 8 1 SET UP 2 DEPTH 12 58 12 CYCL DEF 6 2 PECKG 2 5 F188 ALLOW 8 5 13 CYCL DEF 6 3 RNGLE 45 F188 CYCL CALL M3 L 2 198 R8 F To add a comment to a block that has already been entered select the block and press a horizontal arrow key until the semicolon and the dialog prompt appear MAX M2 Fig 4 19 Dialog for entering comments To enter a comment as a separate block Start a new block by pressing the semicolon key Enter your comment with the alphabetic and n
175. ht of cast surfaces Tolerance checking during machining To program the use of a touch probe press the TOUCH PROBE key You pre position the probe to automatically probe the desired position The coordinate measured for the probe point is stored under a O parameter The TNC interrupts the probing process if the stylus is not deflected within a certain distance selectable via MP6130 Upon contact the position coordinates of the probe are stored in the parameters Q115 to Q119 The stylus length and radius are not included in these values Fig 7 4 Dimensions to be measured Preposition the probe manual to avoid Enter the probing axis for the coordinate for example X Select and confirm the probing direction Enter ali coordinates for the pre positioning point values for example X 5b mm Y 0 Z 5 mm Conclude input Resulting NC block G55 P01 Q5 P02 X X 5 Y40 Z 5 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 19 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 8 Measuring with the 3D Touch Probe During Program Run Example for exercise Measuring the height of an istand on a workpiece Coordinates for pre positioning the 3D touch probe Touch point 1 X 20 mm O11 Y 50 mm 012 Z 10 mm O13 Touch point 2 X 50mm Q21 Y 10 mm 022 Z 0 mm Q23 Part program 96087171 G71 2 2 nemen S aft OF program N10 DOO Q11 POT 420 N20 DOO Q12 P01 50 N30 DOO Q13 POT 10 esses A
176. in a path paralie to the programmed axis Number of axes programmed in the block 1 Fig 5 11 Paraxial movement Movement in the main planes The tool moves to the programmed position on a straight line or circular arc in a plane Number of axes programmed in the block 2 Fig 5 12 Movement in a main plane XY et TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 7 5 Programming Too Movements 5 3 Path Functions Movement of three machine axes 3D movement The tool moves in a straight line to the programmed position dbi jin p G01 X 80 XO Z 10 Number of axes programmed in the block 3 Exception A helica path is created by combining a circular with a linear movement Entering more than three coordinates not TNC 407 The TNC can control up to five axes simultaneously for example three linear and two rotary axes Such programs are too complex to program at the machine however Advantages of five axis machining of 3D surfaces Cylindrical end milis can be used inclined too milling Faster machining Better surface definition Fig 5 14 Example of simultaneous movement of more than three axes machining a 3D surface with an end mili Input example G01 G40 X 20 Y 10 Z 2 A 15 C 6 F100 M3 Fig Oise tpeaneg tee maehinmg three linear and two rotary axes The additional coordinates are programmed as usual in a GO1 block at The TNC graphics cannot simulate four or f
177. in of the Cartesian coordinate system 1 12 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 12 Fundamentals of NC Example Drawing with several relative datums ISO 129 or DIN 406 Part 11 fig 171 Example Coordinates of point X 2 10mm Y 5mm Z 0mm The datum of the Cartesian coordinate system is located 10 mm from point Q on the X axis and 5 mm from it on the Y axis The 3D Touch Probe System from HEIDENHAIN is an especially convenient and efficient way to find and set datums Fig 1 15 Point defines the coordinate System A TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 13 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Absolute workpiece positions Each position on the workpiece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordinates Example Absolute coordinates of position X 20mm Y 10mm Z 15mm If you are drilling or milling a workpiece according to a workpiece drawing with absolute coordinates you are moving the tool to the value of the coordinates Fig 1 16 Position definition through Incremental workpiece positions absolute coordinates A position can also be referenced to the preceding nominal position In this case the relative datum is always the last programmed position Such coordinates are referred to as incremental coordinates increment increase They a
178. ine interpolation polar coordinates G12 Circular interpolation polar coordinates clockwise G13 Circular interpolation polar coordinates counterclockwise G15 Circular interpolation polar coordinates no direction of rotation Gi6 Circular interpolation polar coordinates tangential contour transition Chamfer Rounding Approach contour Depart contour G24 Chamfer with length R G25 Corner rounding with r dius R G26 Tangential contour approach with radius R G27 Tangential contour departure with radius R Tool definition G99 With tool number T length L radius R Tool radius compensation G40 Notool radius compensation G41 Toolradius compensation left of the contour G42 Toolradius compensation right of the contour G43 Paraxial compensation for G07 lengthening G44 Paraxial compensation for G07 shortening Blank for definition for graphics G30 Gt7 G18 G19 MIN point G31 G90 G91 MAX point Simple fixed cycles G83 Pecking G84 Tapping with floating tap holder G85 Rigid tapping G86 Threadcutting G74 Slot milling G75 Rectangular pocket milling clockwise G76 Rectangular pocket milling counterclockwise G77 Circular pocket milling clockwise G78 Circular pocket milling counterclockwise SL Lone group 1 G37 Contour geometry list of subcontour program numbers Gb6 Pilot drilling G57 Rough out G58 Contour milling clockwise finishing G59 Contour milling counterclockwise finishing Non modal functi
179. ing the datum in the tool axis at Fragile workpiece If the workpiece surface must not be scratched you can lay a metal shim of known thickness d on it Then enter a tool axis datum value that is larger than desired datum by the value d Fig 2 5 Workpiece setting in the tool axis right with protective shim Move the too until it touches the workpiece surface ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Select datum setting only DATUM Zero tool Set the display to Z 0 or enter the thickness d of the shim Preset tool Set the display to the length L of the tool here Z 50 mm or enter the sum Z L d TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 7 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 3 Setting the Datum Without a 3D Touch Probe To set the datum in the working plane Fig 2 6 Setting the datum in the working plane plan view upper right Move the zero too until it touches the side of the workpiece ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL Select datum setting only DATUM Enter the position of the tool center here X 5 mm including the sign Repeat the process for all axes in the working plane a The exact dialog for datum setting depends on machine parameters MP 7295 and MP 7296 see page 11 10 2 8 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 4 3D Touch Probes 3D Touch probe applications Your TNC supports a HEIDENHAIN 3D touch probe Typical applications for touch probes Compensatirig misaligned workpiec
180. ioah 5 15 Cela Center JkKsead ans Ree oneal tee 5 16 G02 G03 G05 Circular path around J K 1 D218 G02 G03 GO5 Circular path with defined radius sss 5 21 GO6 Circular path with tangential connection sss D24 G25 Comer rounding sco acte vede gea ere Lote eie ese piso eate asain dodo pere ee OA D Path Contours Polar Coordinates eese 5 28 Polar coordiriate origin Pole l J K sisse OP LO G10 Straight line with rapid traverse eere nente nente tanne tnnt 5 28 G11 Straight line with feed rate F E E A tle OLS G12 G13 G15 Circular path around pole i J K a ranea Leere seen teo awh agen TOU G16 Circular path with tangential transition n wee Helical interpolation ned eei acetic te dorsa ee cC coop reas asain 5 33 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data 5 36 Smoothing corners M90 O RE ROO Machining small contour steps M97 OOS Machining operncontours MOB eee cerei Cerda tecti Ret tage e si petente 5 38 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 M92 a a pean toe 5 39 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 F 1 sese 5 40 Feed rate at circular arcs M109 M110 MT11 seesessssssesssseeeeeenemneeeme teeth 5 41 Insert rounding arc between straight lines M112 E ENS a d Automatic compensation of m
181. ion tapping N140 L1 0 sseuus eee Call subprogram 1 N150 Z 100 M02 ee a IRR E UNDER Retract in the infeed axis end of main program N160 G98 L1 Deme Start subprogram 1 N170 G00 G40 G90 Xe1 5 Y 10 M03 NEEDE Move to hole group 1 N180 Z 2 wo eene Preposition in the infeed axis N190 E2 0 2 5 enarrant MEER Call subprogram 2 i N200 X 45 Y 60 sse Move to hole group 2 N210 L2 0 esent eene Call Subprogram 2 N220 X 75 Y410O aiiiar Move to hole group 3 N230 L2 0 Leserinnen Call Subprogram 2 N240 G98 EO uae eem EA iiaa End of subprogram 1 N250 G98 12 Start of subprogram 2 N260 G79 N270 G91 X 20 M99 sssssseseeeness Drill holes with currently active cycle N280 Y 20 M99 N290 X 20 G90 M99 N300 G98 LO seversseseccersersereeereesersserestsersrreres ENG of subprogram 2 N99999 S610 GA S C OoO e S 4 X x 6 10 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 4 Nesting Repeating program section repeats Program layout REPS G71 e g N15 G98L1 A The program section between this block and G98 L block 20 is repeated twice ed N35 T1 1 aaeeeo akaa The program section between this block and G98 L1 block 15 is repeated once N99999 REPS G71 Program execution 1st step Main program REPS is executed up to block 27
182. ions must be mathematically possibie AXISDOUBLEPROGRAMMED Each axis can have only one vaiue for position coordinates BLK FORM DEFINITION INCORRECT 07 Program the MIN and MAX points according to the instructions e Choose a ratio of sides that is less than 200 1 A chamfer block must be located between two straight line blocks with identical radius compensation e Define a circle center with 1 J UK IK Define a pole with J JK IK CIRCLE END POS INCORRECT Enter complete information for connecting arc Enter end points that ie on the circular path CYCLINCOMPLETE Define the cycles with all data in the proper sequence Do not call the coordinate transformation cycles Define a cycle before calling it Enter a pecking depth other than 0 ARAM TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 29 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 6 TNC Error Messages 11 30 EXCESSIVE SUBPROGRAMMING Conclude subprograms with G98 LO l 7 Program Ln 0 for subprogram calls Program Ln m for program section repeats Subprograms cannot call themselves Subprograms cannot be nested in more than eight levels Main programs cannot be nested as subprograms in more than four levels Enter feed rate for G01 block GROSS POSITIONING ERROR The TNC monitors
183. irection Probe the workpiece Repeat the probing process for points 2 3 and 4 see illustration Enter the coordinates of the datum After the probing procedure is completed the TNC displays the coordinates of the circie center and the circle radius PR 2 18 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 5 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe Setting datum points over holes MRNURL OPERATION ANC EDITING A second soft key row provides soft keys for using holes to set datums The touch probe is used in the same way as in the circle center as datum function see page 2 16 First pre position it in the approximate center of a hole then press the machine START button to automaticaily probe four points in the hole Move the touch probe to the next hole and have the TNC repeat the probing procedure until all the holes have been probed to set datums RCTL X 25 3684 258 3680 B 25 0008 B 331 0868 C 12 5889 M 579 Fig 2 18 Second soft key row for TOUCH PROBE Basic rotation from 2 holes PROBING The TNC measures the angle between the line ROT connecting the centers of two holes and a nominal angular position angle reference axis Datum from 4 holes PROBING The TNC calculates the intersection of the line connecting the first two probed holes with the P line connecting the last two probed holes If a basic rotation was already made from the first tw
184. is also the radius of the arc It is defined by the distance from the starting point to the pole Input Polar coordinate angle H for the end point of the arc LER ec in sree ner aie ic ean MT es SNO M Fig 5 38 Circular path around a pole Defining the direction of rotation Direction of rotation e Clockwise G12 e Counterciockwise G13 No definition G15 the last programmed direction of rotation is used Circle polar coordinates clockwise Enter angle H for the end point of the arc here H 2 30 Confirm entry Further entries if necessary Radius compensation R Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Resulting NC block G12 H30 ERR ctp EE EE PUR EN TEEUTNM 5 30 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements M M M M Pa M e 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Practice exercise Milling a full circle Circle center coordinates Radius Milling depth Tool radius Part program 9685321 G71 eee N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T25 L 0 R 15 N40 T25 G17 1500 N80 Z 5 M03 N90 G11 G41 R 50 H 90 F100 one ceeeeseseesteneesceeeeseneseeeens NT19 G12 a E A EE E EEE N99999 9655321 G71 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 meer enne i iiri Begin the program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 oc ecsescsssseeseeessecscesccerereseesssneseene Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call
185. isplay the angle between the angle reference axis and the side of K2 ROT the workpiece as the ROTATION ANGLE Cancel the basic rotation To restore the previous basic rotation Set the ROTATION ANGLE to the value you wrote down previously To measure the angle between two sides of a workpiece Fig 2 20 Measuring the angle between two sides of a workpiece Select the probing function with the PROBING ROT soft key KR ROT ROTATION ANGLE If you will need the current basic rotation later write down the value that appears under ROTATION ANGLE Make a basic rotation for the first side see Compensating workpiece misalignment Probe the second side as for a basic rotation but do not set the ROTATION ANGLE to zero PROB ING The angle PA between the two sides appears under ROTATION K ROT ANGLE Cancel the basic rotation To restore the previous basic rotation Set the ROTATION ANGLE to the value you wrote down previously TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 23 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 7 Tilting the Working Plane not on TNC 407 The TNC supports machine tools with swivel heads and or swivel tables The program is written as usual in a main plane such as the X Y plane but is executed in a plane that is tiited relative to the rnain plane Typical applications for this function e Oblique holes e Contours in an oblique plane The tilting feature is a coordinate transformation The Z axis re
186. itioning with tilted axes It caiculates a 3D length compensation The radius compensation must be calculated by a CAD system or by a postprocessor A programmed radius compensation RL or RR results in the error message ILLEGAL NC BLOCK Fig 5 51 Offset of the tool datum for tilting the too Thus if you write the NC program with a postprocessor the machine geometry does not have to be calculated If the tool length compensation is calculated by the TNC the programmed feed rate refers to the point of the tool otherwise it refers to the tool datum Cancelling M114 is cancelled by M115 or by a N99 999 block 5 42 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 Standard behavior without M116 The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate in a rotary axis in degrees per minute The contouring feed rate therefore depends on the distance from the tool center to the center of the rotary axis The larger this distance becomes the greater the contouring feed rate Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes with M116 The TNC interprets the programmed feed rate in a rotary axis in mm min The contouring feed rate is therefore independent of the distance from the tool center to the center of the rotary axis Duration of effect M116 is effective until the program ends END PGM block whereupon it is auto
187. itions to be calculated in the block scan Start the block scan RESTORE Return to the contour see next page POSITION eee 38 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run M MMM M M 3 2 Program Run Returning to the contour With the RESTORE POSITION function the TNC returns the tool to the workpiece contour in the following situations Return to contour after the machine axes were moved during a program interruption Return to the position that was calculated for mid program startup RESTORE Select a return to contour POSITION Move the axes in any sequence RESTORE a Z X Resume machining TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 9 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 3 Optional Block Skip In a test run or program run the TNC can skip over blocks that you have programmed with a slash s Shift the soft key row PAGE BEGIN END a 1 TEXT TEXT OFF ON Run the program with without blocks preceded by a slash 3 10 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 4 Blockwise Transfer Testing and Running Long Programs Part programs that occupy more memory than the TNC provides can be drip fed block by block from an external storage device During program run the TNC transfers program blocks from a floppy disk unit or PC through its data interface and erases them after execution This frees up memory space for ne
188. ive axis movements i a He 5 8 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Toot Movements 5 3 Path Functions Overview of path functions input in Cartesian in polar coordinates coordinates Straight line at rapid traverse Straight line at programmed feed rate Chamfer with length R A chamfer is inserted between two straight lines Circle center also the pole for polar coordinates l J K generates no movement i Circular arc clockwise CW Circular arc counterclockwise CCW Programming of the circular path Circle center J K and end point or Circle radius and end point Circular movement without direction of rotation The circular path is programmed with the radius and end point The direction of rotation results from the last programmed circular movement G02 G12 or G03 G13 Circular movement with tangential connection An arc with tangential transition is inserted into the preceding contour element Only the end point of the arc has to be programmed Corner rounding with radius R An arc with tangential transitions is inserted between two contour elements TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 9 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates G00 Straight line with rapid traverse G01 Straight line with feed rate F To program a straight line you enter The coordinates of the end point amp of the straight line Hf necessary radius
189. ize Q12 The parameters additionally defined in the program have the following meanings e Q15 Setup clearance above the sphere Q21 Solid angle during machining Q24 Distance from center of sphere to tool center Q26 Plane angle during machining e Q108 TNC parameter with too radius Part program 9687121 G71 ressessssseeeneeeemeneeeees Start OF program N10 DOO Q1 P01 90 N20 D00 C2 P01 0 N30 DOO Q3 P01 5 N40 DOO O4 P01 45 N50 DOO Q5 P01 2 N60 DOO Q6 P01 0 N70 D00 Q7 P01 360 N80 DOO Q8 P01 5 N90 D00 Q9 P01 50 N100 DOO Q10 PO1 50 N110 D00 O11 PO1 500 N120 DOO Q12 P01 0 Assign the sphere data to the parameters N130 G30 G17 X40 Y 0 Z 50 Define workpiece blank N140 G31 G90 X100 Y 100 Z 0 N150 G99 11 L 0 R 5 Define tool N160 T1 G17 S2500 sese Call tool N170 G00 G40 G90 Z 100 MO6 Retract and insert tool N180 L10 0 Call subprogram N190 24100 M02 Retract in the infeed axis return to beginning of program Continued on next page a TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 27 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 9 Programming Examples N200 G98 L10 N210 D01 Q15 P01 Q5 P02 04 N220 DOO O21 PO1 Q1 enm Determine starting and calculation values N230 D01 O24 P0O1 04 P0O2 0108 z N240 DOO O26 P01 Q6 N250 G54 X QO9 Y O10 Z O4 cece Shift datum to center of sphere N260 G73 G90 H O6 ooo eee eeeeeese
190. l User Parameters Initializing the handwheel This machine parameter reserves 8 bytes for initializing a handwheel input value O to 255 MP 7645 x MP 7645 0 to MP 7645 7 Function The machine tool builder sets the functions of the individual machine parameters for the handwheel grt St C OC COX Vv 11 16 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 2 Miscellaneous Functions M Functions Miscellaneous functions with predetermined effect bc Effective at Start of End of block block Stop program run spindle STOP coolant OFF e Stop program run spindle STOP coolant OFF ciear status display depending on machine parameter go to block 1 Spindie ON clockwise PE Spindle ON counterclockwise Spindie STOP Tool change stop program run depending on machine parameter Spindle STOP Coolant ON Me Coolant OFF M13 Soindie ON clockwise coolant ON n M14 Spindie ON counterclockwise coolant ON Mso Seme as M02 DONE ER HN B Vacant miscellaneous function or Cycle call modally effective depending on machine parameter aa eee M90 Constant contouring speed at corners effective only in lag mode EE foo M91 Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to machine datum E e Within the positioning block Coordinates are referenced to position defined by machine b
191. l life maximum too life and maximum tool life for TOOL CALL Display of the programmed tool and the next replacement tool Coordinate transformations NG G28 X N G 3 GSB H 13 56 e ORTUM SHIFT NB 6 2 F1 01115 12 5099 N9 638 12 5080 N10 GG G4G GSP Z 0z5 M3 N20 De O52 PO1 N3 D21 053 PRI NAG 001 O56 PO NSG neo 258 PO NGO De O72 PO N O 063 972 PO N80 DG 077 PO 017 P92 07 NSG DG4 O77 PQI Q7 P22 Q2 e N1800 D3 077 PO1 Q7 PO2 029 e N119 002 078 P01 018 P22 09 STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS COORD PGM POs TOOL TRANSF Main program name Coordinates of the datum shift ROTATION 346 9409 Angle of basic rotation Qnis IMAGE ae 03 P22 023 OG Po 0108 e 08 Q12 PUZ 026 e 0 2 PO2 29 Mirrored axis x 8 3208 1 011150 Y 2203 1 011150 z 8 3200 1 011150 Scaling factor s Scaling datum 1 28 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Introduction 1 Files Programs texts and tables are written as files and stored in the TNC File identification PROG15 J File name File type To open a new file you must enter a file name consisting of from one to 16 characters letters and numbers depending on MP7222 The fiie types are listed in the table at right File directory The TNC can store up to 100 files at one time You can cell up a director
192. lane The contour is machined throughout in either climb or up cut milling MP 7420 is replaced by DIRECTION OF ROTATION Q9 The machining data such as milling depth finishing allowance and setup clearance are entered as CONTOUR DATA in cycle G120 There are four cycles for contour oriented machining Ld a e PILOT DRILLING G121 ROUGH OUT 6122 FLOOR FINISHING G123 SIDE FINISHING 6124 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 29 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group Il CONTOUR DATA G120 Application Machining data for the subprograms describing the subcontours are entered in cycle G120 These data are valid for cycles G121 to G124 Input data e MILLING DEPTH Q1 Distance between workpiece surface and pocket floor The algebraic sign determines the working direction negative sign means negative working direction PATH OVERLAP FACTOR Q2 Q2 too radius stepover factor k ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q3 Finishing allowance in the working plane ALLOWANCE FOR FLOOR O4 Finishing allowance in the tool axis 5 e WORKPIECE SURFACE COORDINATES Q5 Fig 8 35 Workpiece surface coordinates Q5 Absoiute coordinates of the workpiece surface referenced to the workpiece datum e SETUP CLEARANCE Q6 Distance between the tool tip and the workpiece surface e CLEARANCE HEIGHT Q7 Absolute height at which the tool cannot collide with the workpiece for intermediate positioning and retraction at the end of the cycle e ROUNDING RADIUS Q8 inside
193. lank Tool definition drill bit Tool definition roughing mill Tool definition finishing mill Subprogram cali for tool change Program STOP Tool call drill bit Cycle definition Contour Geometry Cycle definition Pilot Drilling Cycie call Pilot Drilling Tool change Tool call roughing mili Cycle definition Rough Out Cycle call Rough Out Tool change Tool call finishing mill Cycle definition Contour Milling Cycle cali Contour Milling Subprogram for tool change From block N310 Add subprograms on pages 8 24 and 8 25 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group Il The SL cycles of group allow contour oriented machining of complex contours and achieve a particularly high degree of surface finish These cycles differ from those of group in the following ways Before the cycie starts the TNC automatically positions the too to the setup clearance Each level of infeed depth is milled without interruptions since the cutter traverses around islands instead of over them The radius of inside corners can be programmed the tool keeps moving to prevent surface blemishes at inside comers this applies for the outermost pass in cycles G123 and G124 The contour is approached in a tangential arc for side finishing For floor finishing the too again approaches the workpiece in a tangen tial arc for tool axis Z for example the arc may be in the Z X p
194. lay is indicated at the lower left of the graphic 63 Q0228 58 e e SHou omit RESET o n m NL X siuk roRm 9uk FoRM rope o Fig 1 27 Rotated 3D view To switch the frame overlay display on off SHOW OMIT Show or omit the frame overlay of the workpiece blank form BLk FoRM BLk FoRM TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 23 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Magnifying details You can magnify details in the TEST RUN mode of operation in the following display modes projection in three planes e 3D view provided that the graphic simulation is stopped A detail magnification is always effective in all three display modes E285 lt Fig 1 28 LI a detail of a projection in three planes To select detail magnification Shift the soft key row TRANSFER DETAIL Select the top bottom workpiece surface Shift sectional plane to reduce magnify the blank form If desired Select the isolated detail TRRNSFER DETAIL Restart the test run or program run if a graphic display is magnified this is indicated with MAGN at the lower right of the graphics window If the detail in not magnified with TRANSFER DETAIL you can make a test run of the shifted sectional planes Ls the workpiece blank cannot be further plargedor re reduced the TNC saps a an error x message in n the graphics a 8 S E SS Ee 1 24 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics an
195. le then copy them into a new file WZ A Move the text to the beginning of the file Move the cursor to the T of TOOLS SELECT Activate the selecting function BLOCK Move the cursor to the end of the block REMOVE Erase the text and store temporarily BLOCK Move the cursor to the beginning of the file Insert the stored text block Note The stored block is inserted above the cursor and may be off screen Select the text again and copy it into another file Mark the text block as described above Select the function for copying to another file Write the name of the file into which you wish to copy the block for example WZ A Copy into a another file Text block remains marked TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 31 4 Programming 4 10 Creating Pallet Files Pallet files are used with machining centers and contain the foliowing information Pallet number PAL Part program name PGM NAME Datum table DATUM To edit pallet files Cali the file directory Enter the name of the datum table for the program if necessary Create more paliet files NEXT LINE a M M M M 4 32 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 10 Creating Pallet Files The following functions help you to create and change pallet tables BEGIN END TABLE TABLE INSERT DELETE LINE LINE NEXT LINE Move the highlight Go to the beginning end of the table Go to t
196. ler 3ms 2ms 6 ms Control toop cycle time Speed controlier 0 6 ms 1 2 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 Visual display unit and keyboard The 14 inch color monitor displays all the information necessary for effective use of the TNC s capabilities The keys are grouped on the keyboard according to function This makes it easier to create programs and to use the TNC s functions Programming The TNCs are programmed in ISO format It is also possible to program in easy to understand HEIDENHAIN conversational format a separate User s Manual is available for this Graphics Workpiece machining can be graphically simulated both during machining TNC 415 B and TNC 425 only or before actual machining Various dispiay modes are available Compatibility The TNCs can execute all part programs written on HEIDENHAIN TNC 150 B controls or later TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 Keyboard The keys on the TNC keyboard are marked with symbols and abbrevia tions that make them easy to remember They are grouped according to the following functions Typewriter style keyboard for entering file names comments and other texts as weli as programming in ISO format Numerical input and axis selection t7 E o vi E cot Program and file management Arrow keys and GOTO key Machine Programming Dia
197. lling of holes for cutter infeed at the starting points of the subcontours With SL contours consisting of several overlap ping pockets and islands the cutter infeed point is the starting point of the first subcontour The too is positioned at setup clearance over the first infeed point The drilling sequence is identical to fixed cycle G83 PECKING The tool is then positioned above the second infeed point and the drilling process is repeated Input data SETUP CLEARANCE TOTAL HOLE DEPTH PECKING DEPTH DWELL TIME i le G FEED RATE Gio ud FINISHING ALLOWANCE Allowed material for the drilling operation see figure 8 29 The sum of the tool radius and the finishing allowance shouid be the same for pilot drilling as for roughing out TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 Finished workpiece Fig 8 28 Exarnpie of cutter infeed points for PECKING Fig 8 29 Finishing allowance 8 25 8 Cycles 8 8 SL Cycies Group I CONTOUR MILLING G58 G59 The CONTOUR MILLING cycles are used to finish mill the contour pocket The cycles can also be used generally for milling contours Sequence The tool is positioned at setup clearance over the first starting point Moving at the programmed feed rate the tool then penetrates to the first pecking depth e Upon reaching the first pecking depth the tool mills the first contour at the programmed feed rate in the specified direction of rotation At the inf
198. log initiation for Operating modes conversational modes programming The functions of the individual keys are described in the front cover fold out Machine panel buttons e g 1 NC start are describe in the manual for your machine tool In the present manual they are shown in gray ee erent 1 4 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 Visual display unit Brightness contro Contrast control Switchover between the active program ming and machining modes GRAPHICS 1 M srir SCREEN SPLIT SCREEN key for selecting screen m layout Soft keys with context specific N T room text and functions and two shift keys raphics for additional soft key rows SPLIT SCREEN Graphics only GRAPHICS Program text only TEXT Headline The two selected TNC modes are shown in the screen headiine the machining mode to the left and the programming mode to the right The currently active mode is dispiayed in the larger box where dialog prompts and TNC messages also appear Soft keys The soft keys select the functions shown in the soft key row immediately above them The shift keys to the right and left call up additional soft key rows Colored lines above the soft key row indicate the number of available rows The fine representing the active row is highlighted i TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 5 1 Introduction NAA LA CI TEE USER NNNM CORN MEN el
199. m BEGIN TRBLE Go to beginning of daturn table END TRBLE 3 INSERT LINE e Go to end of datum table Page up down e Insert line DELETE LINE Delete line e Enter line go to beginning of next line NEXT LINE 5 New ies can nod be inserted at the end ofthe fi file Wher opening a new datum table be sure to select the correct dimensions mmi nch ww Datums froma datum table can be referenced either tothe current datum of to the machine datum The desired setting is made in MP 7475 ded page 11 1 9 mC U O EGEBQESUPP TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 41 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations MIRROR IMAGE G28 Application This cycle allows you to machine the mirror image of a contour in the machining plane Activation The mirror image cycle becomes active immediate ly upon being defined The mirrored axis is shown in the additional status display if one axis is mirrored the machining direction of the tool is reversed except in fixed cycles lf two axes are mirrored the machining direction remains the same The result depends on the location of the datum ff the datum is located on the contour to be mirrored the part simply flips over e lf the datum is located outside the contour to be mirrored the part also jumps to another location
200. mains parallel to the tool axis and the X Y plane is perpendicular to the tool axis On machines with swivel tables the position of the tool axis relative to the machine coordinate system does not change The coordinate systern is not tilted the slant of the working piane is compensated by tilting the table On machines with swivel heads however the coordinate system does change The slant of the working plane is compensated by tilting the coordinate system n order to run a program in a tilted plane the tool must first be pre positioned in a conventional way for example with a GOO block Traversing reference points with tilted axes When axes are tilted the reference points are traversed by pressing the machine axis direction buttons The TNC interpoiates the tilted axes Make sure that the tilting function is active in the manual operating mode and that the actual angle value of the tilted axis was entered in the menu see page 2 26 Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system After you have positioned the tilted axes set the datum in the same way as for non tilted axes either manually by touching the workpiece with the tool see page 2 7 or much more easily by allowing the part program to automatically set the datum with the aid of the HEIDENHAIN 3D touch probe see page 2 14 The TNC then converts the datum for the tilted coordinate system The angular values for this calculation are taken from the menu
201. matically cancelled URL UI OE NUT tS ee E a SO Aa T ATE E meh et a E Superimposing handwheel positioning during program run M118 X Y Z Standard behavior without M118 in the program run modes the TNC moves the tool as defined in the part program Superimposing handwheel positioning with M118 X Y Z M118 enables manual adjustments to be made with the handwheel during program run The range of this superimposed movement is entered behind M118 in mm in axis specific values for X Y and Z Cancelling M118 X Y Z is cancelled by entering M118 without the values tor X Y and Z Example You wish to use the handwheel during program run to move the tool in the working plane X Y by x1 mm NC block L X 0 Y 38 5 RL F125 M118 X1 Y1 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 43 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 7 Positioning with Manual Data input System File MDI 5 7 Positioning with Manual Data Input System File MDI in the positioning with MDI mode you can program the system file MDI i or MDI H for immediate execution MDI is programmed like any other part program Applications Pre positioning Face milling To program the system file MDi Seiect MDI operating mode Program MDI as desired To execute the system file SiVIDI T CILE TET ra DLL CALL l 5 44 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 7 Positioning with Manual Data input System File MD
202. nd move the tool to the tool change position Sequence of action Move to the tool change position under program control if desired Interrupt program run see page 3 5 Change the tool Continue the program run see page 3 6 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 i 4 13 4 Programming eee 42 Tools Tool change position A tool change position must be located next to or above the workpiece where no collisions are possible With the miscellaneous functions M91 and M92 see page 5 39 you can enter machine referenced rather than workpiece referenced coordinates for the tool change position lf TO is programmed before the first tool call the TNC moves the tool spindie in the tool axis to a position that is independent of the tool length a If a positive length compensation was in effect before TO the clearance to the workpiece is reduced Automatic tool change M101 Standard behavior without M101 When the tool reaches the maximum tool life TIMET the TNC interrupts program run depending on the particular machine Automatic tool change with M101 The TNC automatically changes the tool if the tool life TIME1 or TIME2 expires during program run Duration of effect M101 is reset with M102 Standard NC blocks with radius compensation G40 G41 G42 The radius of the replacement tool must be the same as that of the original tool If the radii are not equal the TNC displays an error message and does not replace the tool
203. neegee 1 74 incremental workpiece POSITIONS ccs eceseeeeeeeeceeneeeacseceeeesseneaeeesuensesssecneeeseeseesaeee 1 14 Programming tool movements ccccscseeeteeseseaceccetanaeessessceesseateessasaesessceneceneaneeeesens 1 17 Fosition encoders is scu eee cete rele ae o E iens pe DEPO EARN YD enI 1 17 Reference marks uaa ae nasi ee operto iue Rees aa Alls sasiedgadeven sa E ERRAT Se red Tear 1 17 NN pT O T e PAE E Sur Pu ELM eta Une gute E Cabe cce ia ws esu og ae 1 18 Graphics and Status Displays EAE tasmanian ati ENS 1 19 Graphics during program run occ cee cesececeeeecnseenenceeeeeescteeeacsaenettesesseeeeceeeestneasteseneeens 1 19 Pian view Ads Projection in a3 planes Cursor position during projection WS plangS ien cec oie erret ree ett oe eamus 1 22 cR MEME 1 22 Magnifying details REM 1 24 Repeating graphic simulation disease set selene ce E E pe aed 1 25 Measuring the machining time 21er reena thia eei a cite dna ate sene pes prid ase ra toast 1 25 Status displays AEREA enit one ee oa Ue qe egere e RE SUE su Me de ees 1 26 Additional status displays cese ssseeeesese sce ee eeee enema esent atatim caeso ap i Na 1720 Files 1 29 File dreto i cs seececstecegeeth rnc ento ono recie aad eer S 1 29 Fil amp St8tUs ioc iE ree ese cepe nene Peer o ae PEU SEE E qua eves 1 30 Selecting a e 5 oce UD oie tas ae es ie toate decd
204. ns after entering a jog increment soft keys see Manual Program run When the program has been started with the machine full sequence START button it runs automatically to its end or until it encounters a program STOP The machining process can be observed on the screen with the Simultaneous graphics feature except TNC 407 Program run Each block must be started separately with the machine ap single block START button The machining process can be observed on the screen with the simultaneous graphics feature except TNC 407 Programming o Programming This mode allows you to edit HEIDENHAIN conversational and editing and ISO programs tool tables datum tables pallet tables and text files and then downloaded or output them over the RS 232 C or RS 422 data interfaces Testprogram The test graphics feature allows you to check part gt programs for errors before actual machining Tool movement Straight line interpolation Cartesian coordinates rapid traverse _ G01 Straightline interpolation Cartesian coordinates G02 Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates clockwise G03 Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates counterclockwise GO5 Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates no direction of rotation G06 Circular interpolation Cartesian coordinates tangential contour transition G07 Paraxial positioning block G10 Straight line interpolation polar coordinates rapid traverse G11 Straight l
205. nsformations Example Datum shift A machining sequence in the form of a sub program is to be executed twice a once referenced to the specified datum C X 0 Y 0 and b a second time referenced to the shifted datum 2 X 40 Y 60 Cycle in part program 96S840l G71 seetetseescseseceesaneeeseteeereese Start OF program N10 G30 G17 X 0 YO Z 20 Define workpiece blank N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 4 Define too N40 T1 G17 51500 Call tool N50 GOO G40 G90 Z4 100 oo eeeseeeeeeee Rettract in the infeed axis N60 17 0 dees cecesesteessteesestiseessteeeeceeeeeneee VEFSION 1 without datum shift N70 G54 X440 Y460 N80 L1 0 detstsesssvearseetsacsriessirserssesssseeeeeeee VOFSION 2 with datum shift N90 G54 X 0 Y 0 YOeeessseeeetteenteteeeteeea inei CENCE datum shift N100 Z 100 M02 N110 G98 L1 N230 G98 LO N99999 S840 G71 OL E a TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 39 8 8 5 Cycles Coordinate Transformations Subprogram N110 G98 L1 N120 X 10 Y 10 M03 N130 Z 2 N140 G01 Z 5 F200 N150 G41 X 0 Y 0 N160 Y 20 N170 X 25 N180 X 30 Y 15 N190 Y 0 N200 X 0 N210 G40 X 10 Y 10 N220 G00 Z 2 N230 G98 LO Depending on the transformations the subprogram is added to the program at the following positions NC blocks LBL 1 LBL 0 Datum shift block N110 block N230 Mirror image rotation scaling block N130 biock N2
206. nt Starting point and end point of the machining sequence are off the workpiece near the first or last contour element The tool path to the starting point or end point is programmed without radius compensation Input For the approach path G26 is programmed after the biock containing the first contour point the first block with radius compensation G41 Fig 5 9 Soft contour approach G42 For the departure path G27 is programmed after the block containing the last contour point the last block with radius compensation G41 G42 Fig 5 10 Soft contour departure Program structure GOO G40 G90 X Y 1 eese eiesseee srira tanei Starting point S G01 G41 X Y F350 m First contour point G26 pM TD Soft approach Last contour point Soft departure End point 5 6 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 40 5 Programming Too Movements 5 3 Path Functions General information Part program input You create a part program by entering the workpiece dimensions Coordinates are programmed as absolute vaiues G90 or relative values G91 In generali you program the coordinates of the end point of the contour element i The TNC automaticaliy calculates the path of the tool based on the tool data and the radius compensation Machine axis movement under program control All axes programmed in a single block are moved simultaneously Paraxial movement The tool moves
207. ntrol positions the tool over the cutter infeed point e The ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE is taken into account e After reaching the first pecking depth the tool mills the contour in an outward direction at the programmed feed rate Q12 e First the island contours C and D in figure 8 39 are rough milled until the pocket contour A B is approached Ld Then the pocket contour is rough milled and the tool is retracted to the CLEARANCE HEIGHT Fig 8 39 Cutter path for ROUGH OUT Input data Aand B are pockets C and D are islands e PECKING DEPTH Q10 Dimension by which the tool is plunged in each infeed negative sign for negative direction e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q11 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min during penetration FEED RATE FOR MILLING 012 Traversing speed of the tool in mm min while milling Required tool The cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 if the pocket is not separately pilot drilled or if the tool must repeatedly jump over contours FLOOR FINISHING G123 Sequence Cycle G123 FLOOR FINISHING functions similar to cycle G122 ROUGH OUT The tool approaches the machining plane in a vertically tangential arc Input data FEED RATE FOR PECKING Q11 Traversing speed of the tool during penetration FEED RATE FOR MILLING O12 Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane NEN a 8 32 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 84 SL Cycles Group II SIDE FINISHING G124 Sequence
208. o ce eect e eee eeeesseaseeentesserereees DZA 625 Corner rounding uie tee tees tpe rete pere ett oit oe decet niae 5 26 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates cesses 5 28 Polar coordinate origin Pole I J K 1 eese eene nennen nene etetetecn 5 28 G10 Straight line with rapid traverse esee emen nennen 5 28 G11 Straight line with feed rate F sss sss EN 5 28 G12 G13 G15 Circular path around pole i J K ssssssesseeeeeeenee OOO G16 Circular path with tangential transition esses nennen 5 32 Helical interpolation a ocasion oi herir peut e et araea tbe Leste aues ease ae ar epis 5 33 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data 5 36 Smoothing corners MODO eerie eei tetti coed rite acera cete a epi T nR 5 36 Machining small contour steps M97 ssssssssssssssseseseeeeeeneenrennenrnnne OOP Machining open contours M98 esses eene ttai 5 38 Programming machine referenced coordinates M91 MS2 prin docete ades 5 39 Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 F sess cetus dtes 5 40 Feed rate at circular arcs M109 M110 M111 eeesssessssssssseeeee eene 5 41 Insert rounding arc between straight lines M112 E us eats DAI Automatic compensation of machine geometry with tilted a axes M1 14 HEN 5 42 Feed rate in mm min on rotary axes A B C M116 ssssssssessseeeeeenememreet nn 5 43 Superimposing handwheel positioning during program
209. o sse diete 2 10 Compensating workpiece misalignment esses 2 12 25 Setting the Datum with a 3D Touch Probe cccsccccossecesssecseses 2 14 Setting the datum in any axis erer rr reer 214 Corner as datulm ts scsecse arto siete deeper te E AS CN ER Dunn 2 15 Circle center as datum uocant ote i rete Moco VIE ERRAT 2 17 Setting datum points over holes oo cesses cccsccecesesesesescecsceccsssscseseecsssesecuseseeepeveseeues 2 19 2 66 Measuring with a 3D Touch Probe eese 2 20 Finding the coordinates of a position on an aligned workpiece oee 2 20 Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane ecen 2 20 Measuring workpiece dimensions cc cseccsceccscccescssescescacescessenecseseascsscacsesevacavscessesess 2 21 Measuring angles RR 2 22 2 7 Tilting the Working Plane not on TNC 407 2 24 Traversing reference points with tilted axes esess see 2 24 Setting the datum in a tilted coordinate system ss serene 2 25 Position display in the tilted system eese tret teterb lia 2 25 Limitations on working with the tilting function seess 2 25 Activating manual tilting 0 ecccssecccnsescccseecsessssssscsceusceseecaracessssececsavseeressareevsvatsecees 2 26 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 1 Test Hun cce errante rq E PCT ES 3 2 Running E Holroreig pbi cR A Running a program test up to a cer
210. o holes these holes do not need to be probed again Circle center from 3 holes PROB ING The TNC calculates a circle that intersects the DU centers of all three holes and finds the center TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 19 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 6 Measuring with a 3D Touch Probe With a 3D touch probe you can determine position coordinates and from them dimensions and angles on the workpiece To find the coordinates of a position on an aligned workpiece ee ING Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING POS 7 POS Move the touch probe to a position near the touch point Soy Y z Probe the workpiece The TNC shows the coordinates of the touch point as DATUM Finding the coordinates of a corner in the working plane Find the coordinates of the corner point as described under Corner as datum The TNC displays the coordinates of the probed corner as DATUM LL E TURE EEE AEE 2 20 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 6 Measuring with a 3D Touch Probe Measuring workpiece dimensions Fig 2 19 Measuring lengths with the 3D touch probe qe ING Select the probing function with the soft key PROBING POS z POS Probe the workpiece if you will need the current datum later write down the value that appears in the DATUM display O E Set the DATUM to 0 ENT Terminate the dialog PEDE INE Select the probe function again with the soft
211. olar Coordinates To program a helix Helix clockwise Enter the total angle through which the tool is to move on the helix in incremental dimensions here H 1080 Enter the height of the helix in the tool axis likewise in incremental dimensions here Z 4 5 mm Confirm your entry Further entries if necessary Radius compensation Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Resulting NC block G12 G91 H 1080 Z 4 5 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Example for exercise Tapping Given data Thread Right handed internal thread M64 x 1 5 Pitch P 1 5 mm Starting angle A 0 End angle A 360 0 at Z 0 Thread revolutions n 8 Thread overrun e at start of thread n 0 5 at end of thread n 0 5 Number of cuts 1 Calculating the input values Total height h Incremental polar coordinate angle H oH og dg 1 n 360 9 see total height h 360 9 3240 TIT 529 Starting angle A with thread overrun n n 0 5 The starting angle of the helix is advanced by 180 n 1 corresponds to 360 With positive rotation this means A with n A 180 180 Starting coordinate Z is negative because the thread is being cut in an upward direction towards Z 0 Part program S5361 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 240 N30 G9
212. on E SL cycles group 2 G37 Contour geometry list of subcontour program numbers G120 Contour data applies to G121 to G124 G121 Pilot drilling G122 Rough out G123 Floor finishing G124 Side finishing G125 Contour train machine open contour Coordinate transformations G53 Datum shift in datum table G54 Datum shift in program G28 Mirror image G73 Rotation of the coordinate system G72 Scaling factor reduce or enlarge contour Special cycles G04 Dwell time F in seconds G36 Oriented spindle stop G39 Program call Define working plane G17 Working plane X Y tool axis Z G18 Working plane Z X tool axis Y G19 Working plane Y Z tool axis X G20 Tool axis IV Dimensioning G90 Absolute dimensions G91 Incremental dimensions Unit of measurement G70 Inches define at start of program G71 Millimeters define at start of program Other G functions G29 Transfer the last nominal position value as a pole circle center G38 Stop program run Gb1 Nexttool number with central tool file G55 Probing function G79 Cycle call G98 Set label number Non modal function 00 Stop program run Spindle stop Coolant off 02 Stop program run Spindte stop Coolant off delete status display depending on machine parameter Return to block 1 M03 Spindle ON clockwise M04 Spindle ON counterclockwise MO05 Spindle stop 06 Tool change spindle stop depending on machine parameter Stop program run r
213. one or more reference marks Coordinates that are referenced to the machine datum are indicated in the display with REF Additional machine datum miscellaneous function M92 In addition to the machine datum the machine manufacturer can also define an additional machine based position as a reference point For each axis the machine manufacturer defines the distance between the machine datum and this additional machine datum If you want the coordinates in a positioning block to be based on the additional machine datum end the block with M92 A a een TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 39 5 Programming Too Movements 5 6 M Functions for Contouring Behavior and Coordinate Data Workpiece datum The user enters the coordinates of the datum for workpiece machining in the MANUAL OPERATION mode see page 2 6 If you want the coordinates to always be reterenced to the machine datum or to the additional machine datum you can inhibit datum setting for one or more axes If datum setting is inhibited for all axes the TNC no longer displays the DATUM SET soft key in the MANUAL OPERATION mode Fig 5 49 Machine datum amp and workpiece datum Feed rate factor for plunging movements M103 F Standard behavior without M103 F The TNC moves the tool at the last programmed feed rate regardless of the direction of traverse Reducing the feed rate during plunging with M103 F The TNC reduces the feed rate
214. orking space Workpiece biank with orthographic Size of the blank projections Coordinate system ZELOO a EE SO MES TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 7 10 MOD Functions 10 6 Showing the Workpiece in the Working Space Overview of functions Function Move workpiece blank to the left or right graphically Move the workpiece blank forward or backward graphically Move the workpiece blank downward or upward graphicaily Show workpiece blank referenced to the set datum Shift the soft key row Show the entire traversing range referenced to the workpiece blank Show the machine datum in the working space Show a position determined by the machine tool builder e g tool change position in the working Space Show the workpiece datum in the working space Disabie OFF or enable ON work space monitoring during test run 10 8 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 MOD Functions 10 7 Position Display Types The positions indicated in figure 10 5 are e Starting position A e Target position of the tool e Workpiece datum W Scale reference point Fig 10 5 Characteristic positions on the workpiece and scale The TNC position display can show the following coordinates Nominal position the value presently commanded by the TNC 1 essere NOML Actual position the position at which the tool is presently located 2 sssseee eene
215. ot te eee Pet 1 30 Copying THES ccr yere e aoc c tante rete ede ae EEEa e EnA an eta eoa vu eea Edd dad eue 1 31 Er sing files n p ease tiet E e See 1 31 Protecting renaming and converting files esses 1 32 File management for files on external data media sss sss 1 34 1 Introduction 1 1 The TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 The TNCs are shop floor programmabie contouring controls for boring machines milling machines and machining centers with up to 5 axes They also feature oriented spindle stop 3 Two operating modes are always active simultaneously one for machine movements machining modes and one for programming or program testing programming modes TNC 425 The TNC 425 features digital control of machine axis speed This provides high geometrical accuracy even with complex workpiece surfaces and at high machining speeds TNC 415 B The TNC 415 B uses an analog rnethod of speed control in the drive amplifier All the programming and machining functions of the TNC 425 are also available on the TNC 415 B TNC 407 The TNC 407 uses an analog method of speed contro in the drive amplifier The programming and machining functions of the TNC 425 are also provided on the TNC 407 with the following exceptions e Graphics during program run e Tilting the machining plane e Linear movement in more than three axes Technical differences between TNCs Control ioop cycle time Position control
216. ous function M Select M for miscellaneous function MISCELLANEOUS FUNCTION M Enter the miscellaneous function for example M6 Press the START button to activate the miscellaneous function See Chapter 11 for a list of the miscellaneous functions To change the spindle speed S Turn the knob for spindie speed override You can vary the spindle speed from 0 to 150 of the last entered value al The knob for spindle speed override is effective only on machines with a stepless spindle drive To change the feed rate F In the MANUAL OPERATION mode the feed rate is set by a machine parameter Turn the knob for feed rate override You can vary the feed rate from 096 to 15096 of the set value LLL 2 6 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 3 Setting the Datum Without a 3D Touch Probe You fix a datum by setting the TNC position display to the coordinates of a known point on the workpiece The fastest easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by using a 3D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN see page 2 14 To prepare the TNC Clamp and align the workpiece Insert the zero tool with known radius into the spindie y g e Select the MANUAL OPERATION or ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL mode Ensure that the TNC is showing the actual values see page 10 9 Sett
217. peration and Setup est Run and Program Run rogramming rogramming Tool Movements subprograms and Program Section Repeats rogramming with O Parameters xternal Data Transfer LL MOD Functions abels Overviews and Diagrams 1 introduction 1 1 1 2 1 3 1 4 1 5 The TNC 425 TNC 415 B and TNC 407 esee 1 2 Keyboard esos eu is abe east onl t eedem sas NETS Pea Seabee ease ode HI eec n 1 4 Visual display Unit 2 rae e ae aa r eaa Ap ced ett ree Eeee E E eaae aa Chehab URP a eee ee Deere eis 1 5 INOR ore ae AE E E SE E ES 1 8 Fundamentals of Numerical Control NC 1 9 feuifore U eiie e Peer EX 1 9 Whatis er et 1 9 The part program ses eei ecce Re eet eU a 1 9 Prodrarmitmilbg eroe Les os te E eerte e Dern Leer ee sees Ine ee EN PRA Rex E TE 1 9 Reference SYSTEM io oec e creer eee ges vai cri de a a pene aea aS 1 10 Cartesian coordinate system sessi enne emere neeneeemeeeeeeess 17 10 Additional AXES a aee e n ae ea e ere ni sees ane EGER ate bite pee Seine 1 11 Polar coordiniates eee diee e EN eU PS EES TERTE 1 11 Setting the pole eee user ep etie eia obe ee ie an sed Datur Setting ne esee i ia aere aeree E dnl PEERS 1 12 Absolute workpiece positions 0 ccceecesscecesecseceesnsecereseceeeseeteenceesensneccaneersnenetenereeees 1 14 Incremental workpiece positions 20 eee ces ce teers cece seneeces
218. positions and movements If the actual position deviates excessively from the nominal position this blinking error message is displayed You must switch off the control to correct the error KEY NON FUNCTIONAL This message always appears when you press a key that is not needed for the current dialog LABEL NUMBER NOT ALLOCATED Call only label numbers that have been set NO EDITING OF RUNNING PROGRAM A program cannot be edited while it is being transmitted or executed PATH OFFSET WRONGLY ENDED MN Do not cancel tool radius compensation in a block with a circular path PATH OFFSET WRONGLY STARTED Use the same radius compensation before and after a G24 and G25 block e Do not begin tooi radius compensation in a block with a circular path TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 6 TNC Error Messages PGM SECTION CANNOT BE SHOWN Enter a smaller tool radius 4D and 5D movements cannot be graphically simulated Enter a tool axis for simulation that is the same as the axis in the definition of the workpiece blank PLANE WRONGLY DEFINED Do not change the tool axis while a basic rotation is active Correctly define the main axes for circular arcs Define both main axes for 1 J UK IK PROBE SYSTEM NOT READY Besure the transmitting receiving window of the TS 511 to the receiving unit Check whether the touch probe is ready for opera
219. programming of Scones positioning locks oe 4 16 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming SSS SSS Sipe 4 3 Tool Compensation Values Machining corners Outside corners The TNC moves the tool in a transitional arc around outside corners The tool roils around the corner point f necessary the feed rate F is automatically re duced at outside corners to reduce stress on the machine for example with very great changes in direction F youa are e working without ra radius compensati D see PADE DSa 3 ux e inside corners The TNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside corners From this point it then starts the next contour element This prevents damage to the workpiece The permissible tool radius therefore is limited by the geometry of the programmed contour ou can influence the machining of outside corners with M90 Fig 4 12 The tool rolis around outside corners Fig 4 13 Tool path for inside corners TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 17 4 Programming 4 4 Program Initiation Defining the blank form If you wish to use the TNC s graphic workpiece simulation you must first define a rectangular workpiece blank Its sides lie parallel to the X Y and Z axes and can be up to 30 000 mm iong The dialog for defining the blank form starts automatically at every pro gram initiation It can also be called with the BLK FORM soft key
220. programs for the subcontours Fig 8 32 PILOT DRILLING cycle Fig 8 33 ROUGH OUT cycle Fig 8 34 CONTOUR MILLING cycie TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 27 8 Cycles 8 3 SL Cycles Group Example Overlapping pockets with islands Inside machining with pre positioning roughing out and finishing PGM 829I is based on S824l The main program section is expanded by the cycle definitions and calls for pilot drilling and finishing The contour subprograms 1 to 4 are identical to the ones in PGM S824i see pages 8 24 and 8 25 and are to be added after block N300 S829 G71 N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 Z 20 N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 2 5 N40 G99 T2 L 0 R 3 N50 G99 T3 L 0 R 2 5 N70 G39 MOB vcs oreet cene e ie tease N80 T1 G17 S2500 N90 G37 P01 1 P02 2 P033 P04 4 N100 G56 P01 2 P02 10 PO3 5 PO4 500 POS 42 N110 2 2 M03 N120 G79 Ni30 L10 0 N140 G38 MOG T ir edo etre eee tees N150 T2 G17 S1750 N160 G57 P01 2 P02 10 P03 5 P04 100 P05 2 P0640 P07 500 HR s N170 Z 2 MOS N180 G79 N190 L10 0 N200 G38 M06 N210 T3 G17 S2500 in N220 G58 P01 2 P02 10 P03 10 Pod 100 PO5 500 N230 Z 2 M03 N250 Z 100 M02 N260 G98 L10 N270 TO G17 N280 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 N290 X 20 Y 20 N300 G98 LO m a N99999 9658291 G71 8 28 Start of program Define workpiece b
221. r tapping with a floating tap holder Higher machining speeds possible Repeated tapping of the same thread repetitions are enabled via spindle orientation to the 0 position during cycle cal depending on machine parameter 7160 see page 11 12 ncreased traverse range of the spindle axis due to absence of a floating tap holder a Machine and control must be specially prepared by the machine manufacturer to enable rigid tapping input data e SETUP CLEARANCE S Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface e TAPPING DEPTH B Distance between workpiece surface beginning of thread and end of thread The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative value means negative working direction e THREAD PITCH The sign differentiates between right hand and left hand threads right hand thread left hand thread Fig 8 3 Input data for RIGID TAPPING cycle d The control calculates the feed rate dom the sapido speed and thread pitch Hf the spindie gaed ovedidet is used during tapping the feed rate is automatically adjusted The feed rate override knob is disabled THREAD CUTTING G86 Process Thread cutting is performed by means of spindie control The spindle rotation is combined with linear movement in the tool axis enabling helix shaped cuts qm G86 THREAD CUTTING is adapted to the control and machine by the machine manufacturer who can provide further information on
222. ram Rectangular Pocket Contour subprogram Circular Island TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 4 SL Cycles Group II CONTOUR TRAIN G125 Sequence This cycle facilitates the machining of open contours the starting point of the contour is not the same as its end point G125 CONTOUR TRAIN offers considerable advantages over machining an open contour using positioning blocks The contro monitors the operation to prevent undercuts and surface biernishes It is recommended that you run a graphic simulation of the contour before execution if the radius of the selected tool is too large the corners of the contour may have to be reworked The contour can be machined throughout by up cut or by climb milling The tool can be traversed back and forth for milling in several infeeds This results in faster machining Allowance values can be entered in order to perform repeated rough milling and finish milling operations Fig 8 40 Example of an open contour Ended att ES 25 CONTOUR TRAIN should not be used for closed contours With closed contours me spk ees aden PAN of the contour must notbe located ind contour Comer 7 input data MILLING DEPTH Q1 Distance between workpiece surface and contour floor The sign determines the working direction fs negative sign means negative working direction e ALLOWANCE FOR SIDE Q3 Finishing allowance in the machining plane e WORKPIECE
223. re also called chain dimensions since the positions are defined as a chain of dimensions Incremental coordinates are designated with the prefix I Example Incremental coordinates of position referenced to position Absolute coordinates of position X2 10mm Y 5mm Z 20mm Incremental coordinates of position X 10mm Ap m IY 10mm Fig 1 17 Position definition through IZ 15 mm incremental coordinates If you are drilling or milling workpiece according to a drawing with incremental coordinates you are moving the tool by the value of the coordinates An incremental position definition is therefore a specifically relative definition This is also the case when a position is defined by the distance to go to the nomina position The distance to go has a negative sign if the target position lies in the negative axis direction from the actual position 1 14 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction The polar coordinate system can also express both types of dimensions Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole I J and the reference axis incremental polar coordinates aiways refer to the last nominal position of the tool Fig 1 18 incremental dimensions in polar coordinates designated by G91 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 15 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Example Workpiece drawing with coordinate dimensioning according to ISO 129 or DIN 406 Part 11
224. re reference marks When a reference mark is crossed over it generates a signal which identifies that position as the machine axis reference point With the aid of this reference mark the TNC can re establish the assignment of displayed positions to machine axis positions If the position encoders feature distance coded reference marks each axis need only move a maximum of 20 mm 0 8 in for linear encoders and 20 for angle encoders Fig 1 21 Linear scales with distance coded reference marks upper illustration and one reference mark lower illustration TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 17 1 Introduction 1 3 Switch On Switch on the TNC and machine tool The TNC automatically initiates the following dialog The TNC memory is automatically checked TNC message indicating that the power was interrupted Clear the message The PLC program of the TNC is translated automaticaily RELAY EXT DC VOLTAGE MISSING Switch on the control voltage The TNC checks the EMERGENCY OFF circuit Move the axes over the reference marks in the displayed sequence For each axis press the START key Cross the reference points in any sequence Press the machine axis direction button for each axis until the reference point has been traversed The TNC is now ready for operation in the MANUAL OPERATION mode sneed only be traversed if ihe machine axes are tobe moved df f you intend only to write ed CX V NG TEST R
225. rea from X 50 to X 100 mm program all X coordinates with the tool radius added and from Y 0 to 100 mm G98 L2 e After each upward pass the tool is moved by an increment of 42 5 mm in the Y axis The illustration at right shows the block numbers containing the end points of the corresponding contour elements Part program 968671 G71 Pinin verat Bt rt program N10 G30 G17 X 0 Y 0 2 70 lt sereen Define blank form note new values N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T1 L 0 R410 1 Define tool N40 T1 G17 1750 koneina Call TOO N50 GOO G40 G90 Z 100 MO6 es e a E Retract and insert tool N60 X 20 Y 1 M03 ennemis Preposition in the plane N70 GIS LT ess EPERE Sees rete Start of program section 1 N80 G90 Z 51 N90 G01 X 1 F100 N100 X 11 646 Z 20 2 eese Program section for machining from N110 GOG X 40 Z40 sss X O to 50 mm and Y 0 to 100 mm N120 G01 X41 N130 G00 Z 10 N140 X 20 G91 Y 2 5 N150 L1 40 Lies Call LABEL 1 repeat program section from block N70 to N150 forty times N160 G90 20 uut Re Week Retract in the infeed axis N170 X120 Yr usse Preposition for program section 2 N180 G98 L2 M Start of program section 2 N190 G90 Z 51 N200 G01 X 99 F100 N210 X 88 354 Z 20 2 sse Program section for machining from N220 GO6 X 60 Z 0 esses X 50 to 100 mm and Y 0 to 100 mm N230 G01 X459
226. rientation S according to the reference axis of the machining plane Input range 0 to 360 Input resolution 0 1 8 48 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 9 External Data Transfer 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 Menu for External Data Transfer Selecting and Transferring Files eese J73 Selecting files uid isl LU M PUE C M d UT N naka 9 3 Renaming files Lucie LU tie de nU D NI TE 9 3 Transferring files AAEE ct nes E EEEE SEE pen 9 3 Blockwise transfer EEEE E eros E E AAI EEE EE Mr Pin Layout and Connecting Cable for the Data Interfaces 9 5 RS 232 C V 24 interface ssssssssssuss Wisi Re hak toan AMI ALME e taco take cen oto ety RS 422 V 11 Interface RE ra Preparing the Devices for Data Transfer 9 7 HEIDENHAIN devices Non HEIDENHAIN devices re dores sinusoidal cup bhnsstesngnee en UU 97 97 9 External Data Transfer eee The TNC features two interfaces for data transfer between it and other devices Application examples Blockwise transfer DNC mode Reading files into the TNC Transferring files from the TNC to external devices Printing files The two interfaces can be used simultaneously 9 1 Menu for External Data Transfer Menu for external data transfer appears on the screen Interface mo
227. roach chamfer rounding depart contour 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 7 Address Letters ISO m Beginning of program or program cali with G39 Rotary motion about the X axis Rotary motion about the Y axis Rotary motion about the Z axis oO omp Parameter definition program parameter Q Feed rate Dwell time with G04 Scaling factor with G72 Q nm mn Preparatory function Angle for polar coordinates in incremental absolute dimensions Rotational angle with G73 X coordinate of circle center pole Y coordinate of circle center pole Z coordinate of circie center pole Set label number with G98 Go to iabel number Tool length with G99 7 7 Miscellaneous function Block number Cycie parameter in fixed cycles Parameter in parameter definitions Program parameter cycie parameter Q o Polar coordinate radius Circle radius with G02 G03 G05 Rounding radius with G25 G26 G27 Chamfer with G24 Tool radius with G99 Spindie speed Oriented spindie stop with G36 Ow DDDDD 44 Tool definition with G99 Tool cal Linear motion parallel to the X axis Linear motion parallel to the Y axis Linear motion parallel to the Z axis MAX zsz c End of block E a T MM 11 34 f TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 7 Address Letters ISO Parameter definitions fe ee aa Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division 05
228. rogram you can save time and reduce the chance of programming errors by entering the sequence once and then defining it as a subprogram or program section repeat Programming variants Repeeting a machining routine immediately after it is executed program section repeat inserting machining routine at certain locations in a program subprogram Calling a separate program for execution or test run within the main program program call Cycles Common machining routines are delivered with the control as standard cycles for Peck drilling Tapping Slot milling Pocket and island milling Coordinate transformation cycles can be used to change the coordinates of a machining sequence in a defined way Examples e Datum shift Mirroring Basic rotation Enlarging and reducing Parametric programming Instead of programming numerical values you enter markers called parameters which are defined through mathematical functions or logical comparisons You can use parametric programming for Conditional and unconditional jumps Measurements with the 3D touch probe during program run Output of values and measurements Transferring values to and from memory t o o The following mathematica functions are available Assign Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Angle measurement Trigonometry eee among others TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 2 Conto
229. rogramming with Q Parameters eee 7 7 Entering Formulas Directly You can enter mathematical formulas that include several operations either by soft key or directly from the ASCII keyboard We recommend entering the operations by soft key since this eliminates the possibility of syntax errors Overview of functions Addition Exampie Q10 Q1 Q5 Subtraction Exampie Q25 Q7 Q108 Multiplication Example 012 5 Q5 Division Example Q25 Q1 Q2 Open close parentheses Exampie Q12 Q1 Q2 Q3 Square Example Q15 SQ 5 Square root Example Q22 SORT 25 _ Sine of an angle Example Q44 SIN 45 Cosine of an angle Example Q45 COS 45 Tangent of an angle Example Q46 TAN 45 7 16 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 7 Entering Formulas Directly Arc sine Inverse of the sine Determine the angle from the ratio of the opposite side to the hypotenuse Example Q10 ASIN 0 75 Arc cosine Inverse of the cosine Determine the angle from the ratio of the adjacent side to the hypotenuse Example Q11 ACOS O Arc tangent Inverse of the tangent Determine the angle from the ratio of the opposite to the adjacent side Example Q12 ATAN Q11 RATAN Powers x Example Q15 3 3 T 3 14159 P Natura logarithm LN of a number base 2 7183 Example 015 LN Q11 LN Logarithm of a number in base 10 Example Q33 LOG 022 LOG Exponential f
230. run M118 X Y Z 5 43 5 7 Positioning with Manual Data Input System File SMDI 5 44 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 6 Subprograms and Program Section Repeats 6 1 Subprograms so tusnasszeucetacets vr EP 6 2 SEQUENCE x oxi Anm bM E E a EEE eite Dee ue ee 62 Operating limitations PE S A E E E ATAS S AE 6 2 Programming and calling subprograms 2 0 2 0 cecscseeccsscsesesscssessecceceessecsscessavenecaterevesens 6 3 6 2 Program Section Repeats 6 5 Operating sequence issssssesseeseeeeeeene enit ttitaitnat narras pese ese Rte t sea sns sss nreo r roont 6 5 Programming notes AA A ESETE EEAS OE 6 5 Programming and executing a program section repeat oo eee ee eeeecceseeseseesecceceevees 6 5 6 3 Main Program as Subprogram cs0cesecccessscceesseenscesenenaees 6 8 it c eT E ENS bi Me 68 Operating limitations iaioe ssent nan ra eera Ee ree E e aatas ieii 6 8 Calling a main program as a Subprogram eseseoseseorreeenneeornonnosrenatesrnasannnsaarennnnannna 6 8 6 4 Nesting aiias MIO eec CENA NSS m 6 9 Nestinig depth 2 5 nei eat eee HA Pc Md 6 9 Subprogram within a subprogram 2 cece ce ccececcsecseseececeseeesereesevsesneasacssssceecacsaeeasaes 6 9 Repeating program section repeats ccecescsesssracscersurseaceesssecaserscccesaassuacescceecauecs 6 11 Rep
231. s 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Polar coordinates are useful with Positions on circular arcs Workpiece drawing dimensions in degrees Polar coordinates are explained in detail in the section Fundamentals of NC page 1 11 Polar coordinate origin Pole i J K The pole can be defined anywhere in the program before blocks containing polar coordinates Similar to a circle center the pole is defined in an I J K block using its coordinates in the Cartesian coordinate system The pole remains in effect until a new pole is defined The designation of the pole depends on the working plane Working piene Fig 5 36 The pole is the same as a circle center G10 Straight line with rapid traverse G11 Straight line with feed rate F e Values from 360 to 4360 are permissible for the angle H The sign of H depends on the angle reference axis Angle from angle reference axis to R is counterclockwise H gt 0 Angle from angle reterence axis to R is clockwise H O Fig 5 37 Contour consisting of straight lines with polar coordinates Straight line in polar coordinates with rapid traverse Enter radius R from pole to end point of line here R 5 mm gj Enter angle H from angle reference axis to R here H 30 Resulting NC block G10 R5 H30 5 28 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Practice exercise Milling a hexa
232. s contain further information on the program run To select additional status displays STATUS Set the STATUS soft key to ON OFFI ON STATUS STATUS STATUS T status STORE Rup 80 00 00 COORD Oro POS TOOL TRRNSF 1 26 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Additional status display General program information STRTUS PGM STRTUS POS Positions and coordinates STRTUS TODL Tool information STRTUS COORD TRANSF Coordinate transformations General program information aT LL N30 061 O53 P2 02 PA Q23 PROGRAMS 3813 N40 D91 956 PO1 Qo POZ 0108 NSG Dae Q58 Pei Os NGG DBS 072 PAI Q12 PO2 C26 N70 O83 G72 Pat 072 PQ2 029 N8 DQ2 Q7 PAI Di PO2 07 e NSQ DGS O77 PAI 077 PO2 02 e NIBO Da3 O7 PO1 077 PO2 029 e N110 082 O78 PBL 018 PAZ 08 Ni2Q D084 O78 P21 078 PQ2 026 Ni130 D33 978 PO 078 Paz 029 N140 DQ2 O76 POI 016 PO2 06 NiS DO4 076 Pei 076 POZ 025 e N160 DO3 Q 6 PQI 07G PO2 Q29 e N170 G54 X Q1 v O2 24053 e Active programs 1 PECKING CC x 35 2680 E xe Cycle definition Dwell time counter DUELL D 28 00 20 Td Circle center CC pole Machining time Type of position display 73805 G71 N13 G3 G1 X Q V Q 2 40
233. s replaced with the new text You can toggle between the INSERT and OVER WRITE modes with the soft key at the far lett The wove wc kd aom eo pon selected mode is shown enclosed in a frame mex m BS TD fe Ea Fig 4 17 TNC text editor screen 4 26 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 49 Text Files Entering text The text that you type always appears on the screen where the cursor is located You can move the cursor with the cursor keys and the following soft keys Move one word to the right Move one word to the left 3o to the next screen page Go to the previous screen page Go to beginning of file Go to end of file in each screen line you can enter up to 77 characters from the aiphabetic and numeric keypads The alphabetic keyboard offers the following function keys for editing text Begin a new line e Erase character to left of cursor backspace nsert a blank space Exercise Write the following text in the file ABC A You will need it for the exercises in the next few pages JOBS n IMPORTANT MACHINE THE CAMS ASK THE BOSS PROGRAM 1375 H 80 OK BY LUNCH TOOLS TOOL 1 DO NOT USE TOOL 2 CHECK REPLACEMENT TOOL TOOL 3 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 PROGRRHMINS RND EDITING eee JOBS eve 13 IMPORTANTS MACHINE THE CAMS RSK THE BOSS PROGRAM 1375 H Bax OK BY LUNCH TOOLS TOOL OO NOT USE TOOL 2 CHE
234. screen headline Cancel the file protection The file no longer has the status P You can now unprotect further files simply by marking them and pressing the UNPROTECT soft key e aaa aaamaaaaaaaamaaammammaI 1 32 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 Introduction 1 5 Files To rename a file Move the highlight to the file that you wish to rename RENAME Select RENAME Fae pa C DESTINATION FILE Type the new file name into the highlight in the screen headline The file type cannot be changed Rename the file To convert a file Text files type A can be converted to any other type Other types of files can oniy be converted into ASCII text files They can then be edited with the alphanumeric keyboard Part programs that were created with FK free contour programming can also be converted to HEIDENHAIN conversational programs Move the highlight to the file you wish to convert CONVERT Select CONVERT ABC kv2 CONVERT Select the new file type here an ASCII text file type A DESTINATION FILE A Type the new file name into the highlight bar in the screen headiine a a a TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 33 1 introduction 1 5 Files File management for files on external data media You can erase and protect files stored on the FE 4018 floppy disk unit from HEIDENHAIN You can also format a floppy disk from the TNC To do this you must
235. sed on three coordinate axes X Y and Z which are parallel to the machine guideways The figure to the right illustrates the right hand rule for remembering the three axis directions the middle finger is pointing in the positive direction of the tool axis from the workpiece toward the tool the Z axis the thumb is pointing in the positive X direction and the index finger in the positive Y direction Fig 1 10 Designations and directions of the axes on a milling machine AAA a A ee 1 10 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Additional axes The TNC can control the machine in more than three axes Axes U V and W are secondary linear axes parallel to the main axes X Y and Z respec tively see illustration Rotary axes are also possible and are designated A B and C Fig 1 11 Direction and designation of additional axes Polar coordinates Although the Cartesian coordinate system is especially useful for parts whose dimensions are mutually perpendicular in the case of parts contain ing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the dimensions in polar coordinates While Carte sian coordinates are three dimensional and can describe points in space polar coordinates are two dimensional and describe points in a plane Polar coordinates have their datum at a pole I J K from which a position is measured in terms of its distance from the pole and the angle of its position
236. sformations TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 37 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations DATUM SHIFT G54 Application A datum shift allows machining operations to be repeated at various locations on the workpiece Activation After cycle definition of the DATUM SHIFT all coordinate data are based on the new datum The datum shift is shown in the additional status display Input data For a datum shift you need only enter the coordinates of the new datum zero point Absolute values are referenced to the manually set workpiece Fig 8 42 Activation of datum shift datum Incremental values are referenced to the datum which was last valid this can be a datum which has already been shifted Fig 8 43 Datum shift absolute Fig 8 44 Datum shift incremental Cancellation A datum shift is cancelled by entering the datum shift coordinates X 0 Y OandZ 0 Graphics if you program a new workpiece blank after a datum shift MP 7310 determines whether the workpiece blank is referenced to the current datum or the original datum MP 7310 see page 11 10 Referencing a new workpiece blank to the current datum enables you to display each part in a program in which several parts are machined NEN ENMETCCC E M M 4 QA 9 QQ A 8 38 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles amp 5 Coordinate Tra
237. sin ote Pena desee da 1 30 Copylhg files ince eere et one ie I Ger pete MES Ie Re edle c et RR reete leeren 1 31 Erasinig THES uon Led A EA NRI oboe ta ioo uer bat Lido Boeth 1 31 Protecting renaming and converting files essent 1 32 File management for files on external data media 1 34 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Manual Operation and Setup 2 1 Moving the Machine Axes csscscsssssssessssssccsssessssecsesseceseceesessenes 2 2 Traversing with the machine axis direction buttons se 2 2 Traversing with an electronic handwheel a e 23 Working with the HR 330 electronic handwheel l LL 2 3 Incremental jog positioning puri ual eet ake DIN Eo tr eo uL Positioning with manual data input MDI O n 2 4 22 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F Miscellaneous Functions M 2 5 Entering the spindle speed 8 oe o edo Red 2 5 Entering a miscellaneous function M 228 Changing the spindle speed S esee ette 2G Changing the feed rate F iii se oit ipu xti secet an 2 6 2 3 Setting the Datum Without a 3D Touch Probe eee 2 7 Setting the datum in the tool axis n l ts 27 Setting the datum in the working piane EE A 24 3D Touch Probee ccccssssccsscscssensssonssscesacsnrscnsecesecssarsecnsssasseceas 2 9 3D touch probe applications M HO A E E E Selecting the touch probe functions TEE E Calibrating the 3D touch probe
238. sseeseeseseissesseeseenea ens emenn sett tnnt nnn nnn nennt rtt nennen Tool compensation data in the TOUCH PROBE block MP 7411 l Function e Current tool data are overwritten by the calibrated data from the touch probe system e Current tool data are retained ccccccccscccsessscscccssesececececesscecccccacsecnansscccessnessussaseccassseseecasonsasosssereereeesnscaeseas aaan a Se 11 12 m TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters Behavior of machining cycles This general user parameter affects the pocket milling technique Input value O to 15 sum of the individual values in the Value column MP 7420 Function Cases Direction for milling a channel Clockwise for pockets counterclockwise for islands around the contour Counterclockwise for pockets clockwise for islands Sequence of roughing out First mill the channel then rough out the pocket and channel milling First rough out the pocket then mill the channel Combining contours Combine compensated contours e sse Combine uncompensated contours esie Milling in depth Mill the channel and rough out for each infeed depth before continuing to the next depth ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeceeees Complete one process for all infeeds before switching iothe other prOCess 5 ulcere eee riee eben AEE Overlap factor for pocket milling Amount of overlap tor pocket milling Product of
239. sssececeseenees Circle center Y N80 DOO Q8 PO1 50 esses Circle starting point X N90 DOO Q9 P01 0 cee sees Circle starting point Y N100 DOO Q10 POT 40 ssssssssssssssssss POO length L N110 DOO Q11 POT 15 eee eese Tool radius R N120 DOO Q20 POT 100 essen Milling feed rate F N130 G30 G17 X 1 Y 1 2 20 N140 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N150 G99 T6 L Q10 R Q11 N160 T6 G17 1000 N170 G00 G40 G90 Z 01 MOS N180 X Q2 Y O3 N190 Z Q5 MOS esses Block N130 to N260 correspondingly N200 H Q6 J Q7 sesss sse Block N10 to N140 from program S520l I N210 G01 G41 X 08 Y Q9 FQ20 N220 G26 R10 N230 G02 X Q8 Y Q9 N240 G27 R10 N250 G00 G40 X 04 Y Q3 N260 Z Q1 M02 N99999 968741 G71 7 6 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 2 Describing Contours Through Mathematical Functions Select the BASIC ARITHMETIC soft key to call the following functions Overview The mathematical functions assign the result of one of the following operations to a Q parameter Do ASSIGN Example D00 Q5 P01 60 Assigns a numerical value D1 ADDITION Example D01 Q1 P01 Q2 P02 5 Calculates and assigns the sum of two values D2 SUBTRACTION Example D02 Q1 P01 10 P02 5 Calculates and assigns the difference of two values D3 MULTIPLICATION Example D03 Q2 P01 3 P02 3 Calculates and assigns the product of two values D4 DIVISION Example D04
240. sssseeeeeennenmne N70 2 15 MOS isse diee iere N80 G01 G41 X 50 Y 0 F100 sess N90 X 10 Y 40 initiis ieies rn peirianneg N100 GOG X450 Y 50 esssssssssseeee N110 G01 X 100 eeeeseeert ettet N120 GOO G40 X 130 Y 70 sss N130 Z 100 MQO2 nieder mnes N99999 5525 G71 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Begin the program Define the workpiece blank Define the tool Call the tool Retract and insert tool Pre position in the working plane Move the too to working depth Approach the contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate Straight line to which the arc tangentially connects Arc to end point X 50 mm Y 50 mm connects tangentially to the straight line in block N90 Complete the contour Depart the contour cancel radius compensation Retract in the infeed axis 5 25 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates G25 Corner rounding The tool moves in an arc that is tangentially connected to both the preceding and following contour elements G25 is used to round corners Input Radius of the arc Feed rate for the arc Prerequisite The rounding radius must be large enough to accommodate the tool Fig 5 35 Rounding radius R between G1 and G2 mate E oscar Saeed again oe in pale UR ERRANT II REIN WERE Ll ue oe M M H To program a tangential arc betwe
241. ssssscccnscceseeeenersenenenanesrensnceenes 10 11 10 11 HELP files n 10 12 10 MOD Functions The MOD functions provide additional displays and input possibilities The available MOD functions depend on the selected operating mode Functions and displays available in the PROGRAM MING AND EDITING mode of operation 9 9 9 EE Display NC software number Display PLC software number Enter code number Set data interface Machine specific user parameters HELP files if provided in the TEST RUN mode of operation Display NC software number Display PLC software number Enter code number Set data interface Graphic dispiay of the workpiece blank in the working area of the machine Machine specific user parameters HELP files if provided In all other modes 10 2 Display NC software number Display PLC software number Display code digits for installed options Select position display Unit of measurement mm or inch Programming language HEIDENHAIN or ISO Axis traverse limits Display datums HELP files if provided NUMBER SOFTWARE NUMBER 259938 07S SOFTWARE NUMBER 252499 t Fig 10 1 MOD functions in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode CODE NUMBER NC SOFTWARE NUMBER 258838 67S PLC SOFTWARE NUMBER 252499 81 RS 232 DATUM USER ee ee Fig 10 2 MOD functions in the TEST RUN mode MANUAL OPERATION POSITION DISPLAY
242. stopwatch i functions appears poe U OT lll Eee STORE ADD 00 00 00 D O O CO ath hes soft keys avain to the left e Hie e stopwatch function Spana a on nthe selected d siloyn mode m X M eaaa a fl AEEA TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 25 1 Introduction 1 4 Graphics and Status Displays Stopwatch function Store dispiayed time STORE ABD RESET 98260288 D Show the sum of the stored time and the displayed time Clear displayed time 38e5 GPI N18 G30 G1 X46 V 2 40 9 NeG G31 G9 X 100 V 190 2 0 N30 G99 T1 L R 5 e NSG Ti Gi 1586 e NBO 509 G49 699 2 50 e NGG G 5 PO 2 PO2 20 Pga 10 P94 100 PQS x 80 POG V 50 PD 520 e During a program run mode of operation the status display contains the current coordinates and the following information Type of position display ACTL NOML Number of the current tool T Tool axis Spindle speed S Feed rate F Active M functions Control in operation symbol Axis is locked symbol Axis can be moved with the handwheel Q3 Axes are moving in a tilted working plane K Axes are moving under a basic rotation yy 132 68790 12 5609 158 2560 B 30 0000 c 96 880 M 5 3 Fig 1 30 Status display in a program run mode of operation Additional status displays The additional status display
243. such as Rigid Tapping SET UP CLEARANCE Enter the setup ciearance here 2 mm TOTAL HOLE DEPTH Enter the total hole depth here 30 mm Enter the thread pitch here 0 75 mm Resulting NC block G85 P01 2 P02 30 P03 0 75 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 8 1 Cycles General Overview Cycle call The following cycles become effective automatically as soon as they are defined in the part program Coordinate transformation cycles e Dwell time cycle SL cycles which determine the contour and the global parameters Ali other cycles must be called separately Further information on cycle calls is provided in the descriptions of the individual cycles If the cycle is to be programmed after the block in which it was called program the cycle call with G79 with miscellaneous function M99 If the cycle is to be executed after every positioning block it must be called with miscellaneous function M89 depending on the machine parameters M89 is cancelled with e M99 G79 A new cycle definition Prerequisites A P4 The following data must be programmed before a oyde call Blank form for graphic display Tool call Positioning block for starting position X Ys M Positioning block for starting position Z setup dd Direction of spindle rotation miscellaneous functions S M3 MA Ki Ries definition Dimensions in the tool axis The dimensions for the tool axis are alwa
244. t taking the finishing allowance into account e The tool then penetrates the workpiece at the programmed feed rate for pecking Milling the contour The tool mills the first subcontour at the specified feed rate taking the finishing allowance into account e As soon as the too returns to the infeed point it is advanced to the next pecking depth This process is repeated until the programmed milling depth is reached Further subcontours are milled in the same manner Roughing out pockets After milling the contour the pocket is roughed out The stepover is defined by the tool radius slands are jumped over If required pockets can be cleared with several downfeeds gt Atthe end of the cycle the tool is retracted to the setup clearance Required tool The cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 if the pocket is not separately pilot drilled or if the tool must repeatedly jump over contours input data e SETUP CLEARANCE A e MILLING DEPTH The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative value means negative working direction e PECKING DEPTH e FEED RATE FOR PECKING Traversing speed of the tool during penetration e FINISHING ALLOWANCE Allowance in the machining plane positive value aaa een ec ig 8 14 SO ROUGH OUT ANGLE i ROUGH OUT cycle Feed direction for roughing out The rough out angle is relative to the angle reference axis and can be set so that the resulting
245. t 2nd character E Data output 1st character H Data output 2nd character A Start of heading SOH End of transmission block ETB Positive acknowledgement ACK Negative acknowledgement NAK End of transmission EOT ASCII character TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Pararneters Parameters for 3D touch probes Signal transmission for touch probe MP 6070 Function Traversing behavior of touch probe Parameter Function Value MP 6720 Probing feed rate in mm min 80 to 3000 MP 6130 Maximum traverse to the first probe point mm 0 to 99 999 999 MP 6140 Safety clearance to probing point during automatic measurement mm 0 to 99 999 999 MP 6150 Rapid traverse for probing mm min 1to 300 000 M function for 180 rotation of the 3D touch probe The center misalignment of the stylus is compensated with a rotation The machine tool builder sets the number of the M function that starts the rotation MP 6160 Function Mi function aCtIve ose E ESEN E A E e M function inactive Reserved machine parameters The foliowing machine parameters are assigned functions for the HEIDENHAIN measuring touch probe A description of these functions will be released at some point in the future MP Value MP 8300 eoe eee nte eerte teas a ecco Dr debo telat eodd 0 1000 to 3 0000 0 100 to 10 000 80 to 3000 80 to 3000 0 0000 to 10 0000 0 000 to 1
246. t the path function how the tool should move toward the t rget position and the feed rate Information on the radius and length of the tool spindle speed and tool axis must also be included in the program Programming ISO programming is partially dialog guided The programmer is free to enter the individual commands words in each block in any sequence except with G90 G91 The commands are automaticaliy sorted by the TNC when the block is concluded TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 1 9 1 Introduction 1 2 Fundamentals of NC Reference system In order to define positions a reference system is necessary For example positions on the earth s surface can be defined absolutely by their geographic coordinates of iongitude and latitude The word coordinate comes from the Latin word for that which is arranged The network of horizontal and vertical lines around the globe constitute an absolute reference system in contrast to the relative definition of a position that is referenced to a known location Bm SSREE SSN Fig 1 9 The geographic coordinate system is an absolute reference system Cartesian coordinate system On a TNC controlled milling machine workpieces are normally machined according to a workpiece based Cartesian coordinate system a rectangu lar coordinate system named after the French mathematician and philosopher Renatus Cartesius who lived from 1596 to 1650 The Cartesian coordinate system is ba
247. t 12 Parameters for the electronic handwheel cessor eeeeeeeees does stessi ete fes 11 1 5 Miscellaneous Functions M Functions 11 17 Miscellaneous functions with predetermined effect ssssseee 11 17 Vacant miscellaneous functions cccccsssesccecccescsccseesesssersesesecestscsstseesssecteteseneees EER Preassigned Q Parameters PS ED E Diagrams for Machining eere neaennnennenness 11 21 Spindle speed S sene espe duet tpa ceiver d 192 Feed rate F Ls E EEE EREE 11 22 Feed rate F for tapping degens o eea a aaa aE paer iaeia aaia aaeain LTD Features Specifications and Accessories 11 24 Programmable functions ssss esent eterne 11225 Accessories eoe seem eee prre PSU ERE pas ee ence n chro rund oS Lr Face Ge 11 27 TNC Error Messages PLE TNC error messages during programming e a a aa a eee TNC error messages during test run and program run mn nb Address Letters ISO ecce cese eee eene eenen netiis LESS G functions aeica rti taiccer tuat decive n ea canes oes TE Ue VAS 11 33 Parameter definitions 3 o reci ea iar st EEEa bee Ce e e eua Ld EE CHA BEA Eee 11 35 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 1 General User Parameters General user parameters are machine parameters affecting TNC settings that the user may want to change in
248. t in the plane N290 Z Q12 tenementis Hapid traverse in Z to setup clearance N300 G01 Z Qo FQ10 We E AEA eU ena ven MSRP ERUNT Plunge to milling depth at plunging feed rate N310 G98L1 N320 036 Q36 Q3 usc kranai Update the angle N330 Q37 O37 1 eene Update the counter N340 Q21 Q3 COS Q36 enini Calculate the next X coordinate N350 Q22 O4 SIN O36 ee Calculate the next Y coordinate N360 G01 X Q21 Y 0Q22 FO11 sees Move to next point N370 D12 P01 O37 P0247 P031 Not finished N380 G73 G90 H O essent Reset rotation N390 G54 seems RESET datum shift N400 G00 G40 G90 Z 01 2 eei Move in Z to setup clearance N410 G98 LO Rane renee MINE o of subprogram N99999 ELLIPSE G71 7 26 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 9 Programming Examples Hemisphere machined with end mill Notes on the program The tool moves upward in the Z X plane e You can enter an oversize in block 12 Q12 if you want to machine the contour in Several steps The tool radius is automatically compensated with parameter Q108 The program works with the following quantities Solid angle Starting angie Q1 End angle Q2 increment Q3 Sphere radius Q4 e Setup clearance Q5 Plane angle Starting angle Q6 End angle Q7 Increment Q8 Center of sphere X coordinate Q9 Y coordinate Q10 e Milling feed rate Q11 Overs
249. t the program and start data transfer Go to the block number at which you wish to begin data transfer for example 150 Execute the transferred blocks starting with the block number that you entered Test the transferred blocks starting with the block number that you entered Asan siteindves you can call the extemal program with EXT see page 68 and prion a mic program startup see page 3 9 You can use machine parameters see page 4 EIo define the memory range to ybe ed duting Bis ckwis transfer This prevents the transferred program from Sing the program memory and disabling the dex M programming feature c aaa el 3 12 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 45 4 6 4 7 4 8 4 9 4 10 4 11 Creating Part Programs eese eterne tte enne enne AO AVOUT OF a Dr OGfemiisid ete be e Re tette gene ipe end Ife tiro FUNCTIONS REM E 4 3 Tools Tc DN ENS iia Ss Setting the tool data ep eene Lote seat ier AEE A aE 4 5 Entering tool data into the program sss d esse de ee UR Ten SERO AIE 4 7 Entering tool data in tables ssssssseseeeeeenetntnnn tenente nene nennet terne Tool data in tables ssssssssss Pocket table for tool changer Calling too data Tool change Automatic tool change M10 ieiunii endete rti Peek era cene esca 4 14 Effect of tool compensation values
250. tain block ssssssssseseeee meer 3 3 The display functions for test run PETRA Sopdet xt EE EA ETE T 3 3 3 2 Program Run A TAIA DS 3 4 Running part progra eso e edere ep imer ales eaa IRI epe eee cee 34 Interrupting machining CH 3 5 Moving the machine axes during an interruption eese SG Resuming program run after an interruption sseesessssssseeeeenerett ene we 9 6 Mid program startup cece eee EA ATENEA E EAA sese Is 3 8 Returning to the CONTOUT 22 5 secsccstdyts sist cevttetenesssenceseesbieeda ertet Eo Fede usu er iui red edad 3 9 3 3 Optional Block Skip T PUR 3 10 3 4 Blockwise Transfer Testing and Running Long Programs 3 11 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 Programming 4 1 Creating Part Programs eere Vene een VE suere tin 4 2 Layout OF prOgr Tri esie ricco ect visae ctesttoessabavsiidsceossuia a Mee Editing f nctions cran teca tbe e eie ieri e DE N Penes 43 42 NOUS E E De cT TRE 4 5 Setting the tool data cere deni etsen eere eb dote a trei ettet i a 4 5 Entering too data into the program serere 407 Entering too data in tables nacen Aaa aaao a na aab a hana totins 4 8 WOOl Gata IN tBDles osc iei Leere iet eee patere ree Ce PL ted A TT A ETE ods aeo Eiaa 4 10 Pocket table for tool changer essere ettet eene 412 Calling to l data ei eet eter e tiiniice
251. tem This feature ensures the downward compatibility of the TNC 425 to earlier software versions and other TNCs Selecting the resolution To select the resolution of the transferred data go to the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode of operation Cail the data transfer menu Hoe Select the MOD functions RS232 INTERFACE RS422 INTERFACE MODE OF OP GEMM MODE OF OP FE 1 BRUD RATE BAUD RATE FE 9688 FE 9608 EXT1 9688 EXT1 9686 EXT2 9689 EXT2 9689 LSV2 38408 gt 118 RSSIGN PROGRAMMING RS232 PRINT RS232 PROGRAM RUN RS232 PRINT TEST RS232 TEST RUN RS232 ET RS 422 iun seque 1m ESR Fig 10 4 The FORMAT 1 um 0 1 um soft key ensures downward compatibility FORMAT Set format to 1 um or 0 1 um 1UM E 1UM Leave the MOD functions TRANSFER Transfer the program gt TNC EXT Setting the baud rate The baud rate data transfer speed can be selected from 110 to 38400 baud qth The baud rate of the ME 101 is 2400 baud t is not possible to transfer through one interface at 19 200 baud and another interface at 38 400 baud at the same time ASSIGN This function determines which interface RS 232 or RS 422 is used for external data transfer in the indicated TNC modes of operation TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 10 5 10 MOD Functions 10 4 Setting the Externai Data Interfaces PRINT and PRINT TEST The PRIN
252. termining tool length with a zero tool For the sign of the tool length L L gt L Thetoolis ionger than the zero tool L L The tool is shorter than the zero tool Fig 4 2 Fig 4 3 Oversizes DL DR on a toroid cutter Too lengths are entered as the difference from the zero tool If necessary set the datum in the tool axis to 0 Change tools Move the new tool to the same reference position as the zero tool Move the zero too to the reference position in the tool axis e g workpiece surface with Z 0 The TNC displays the compensation value for the length L Note down the value and enter it later Enter the display value by using the actual position capture function see page 4 24 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 2 Tools Entering too data into the program The following data can be entered once for each tool in the part program Tool number Tool length compensation value L Tool radius R To enter tool data into the program block ooo em TOOL NUMBER Give the tool a number for example 5 TOOL LENGTH L Enter the compensation value for the tool length e g L 10 mm Enter the tool radius e g R 2 5 mm Resulting NC block G99 T5 L 10 R 5 You can enter the tool length L directly in the tool definition by using the actual position capture function see page 4 24 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 7 4 Programming 4 2 Tools
253. the machine geometry when working with Swivel axes amp A4 C Daans AMAA A
254. the tool Retract and insert tool Set pole Pre position in the working plane with polar coordinates Move tool to working depth Approach the contour with radius compensation at machining feed rate Soft tangential approach Circle to end point H 270 negative direction of rotation Soft tangential departure Depart contour cancel radius compensation Retract in the infeed axis 5 31 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates G16 Circular path with tangential transition Moving on a circular path the too transitions tangentieily to the previous contour element to et Input Polar coordinate angle H of the arc end point Polar coordinate radius R of the arc end point E Fig 5 39 Circular path around a pole with tangential transition d Th vansion point musi be exactly defined l E The poe is mot the c fiter of theo contour arc l B Circle polar coordinates with tangential transition RJ 0 Enter distance R from arc end point to pole here R 10 mm Hag Enter angle from reference axis to R here H 80 and confirm entry Further entries if necessary Es Cl Radius compensation R Feed rate F Miscellaneous function M Resulting NC block G16 R 70 H 80 fe Pm s D EE PR RR REP RR RE EE 5 32 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 5 Path Contours Polar Coordinates Helic
255. tion PROGRAM START UNDEFINED Begin the program only with a G99 block Do not resume an interrupted program at a block with a tangential arc or if a previously defined pole is needed Program the first block with axis motion with G00 G40 G90 RADIUS COMPENSATION UNDEFINED Enter radius compensation G41 or G42 in the first subprogram for cycle G37 CONTOUR GEOMETRY ROUNDING OFF NOT PERMITTED Enter tangentially connecting arcs and rounding arcs correctly ROUNDING RADIUS TOO LARGE Rounding arcs must fit between contour elements TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 i 11 31 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 6 TNC Error Messages 11 32 SELECTED BLOCK NOT ADDRESSED 7 Before a test run or program run you must enter GOTO 0 STYLUS ALREADY IN CONTACT Before probing pre position the stylus where it is not touching the workpiece surface TOOL RADIUS TOO LARGE Enter a tool radius that lies within the given limits i permits the contour elements to be calculated and machined TOUCH POINT INACCESSIBLE Pre position the 3D touch probe to a position nearer the model WRONG AXIS PROGRAMMED Do not attempt to program locked axes Program a rectangular pocket or slot in the working plane Do not mirror rotary axes Enter a positive chamfer length Program a spindle speed within the permissible range WRONG SIGN PROGRAMMED Enter the correct sign for the cycle
256. tive immediately upon definition This cycle is aiso effective in the POSITIONING WITH MANUAL INPUT mode Reference axis for the rotation angle X Y plane X axis Y Z plane Y axis e Z X plane Z axis The active rotation angle is displayed in the additional status display input data The rotation angle is entered in degrees Input range 360 to 360 absolute or incremental Cancellation Rotation is cancelled by entering a rotation angle of 0 Example Rotation A contour subprogram 1 is to be executed once as originally programmed referenced to the datum X40 Y 0 and then rotated by 35 and referenced to the position X 70 Y 60 Continued on next page ep gp fi fp pt SS SS lt 844 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 5 Coordinate Transformations ROTATION cycle in a part program 2698461 G71 teens Start OF program N10 G30 G17 X40 0 Z 20 x Define workpiece blank N20 G31 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 E N30 G99 T1 L 0 R 4 seseeeeeeces Define tool N40 T1 G17 S1500 ooo esee Call tool N50 GOO G40 G90 24100 ssesseessesesssss REtract in the infeed axis N60 L1 0 sovachesnsseeseesesecsssesseeerersscesssrereesessssaeeees VEFSION 1 not rotated N70 G54 X 70 yeo i N80 G73 G90 H 35 N90 L1 0 eerte eene enetene tentem stent VerSiIOn 2 shifted and rotated N100 G73 G90 H 0 Cancel rotation N110 G54 X 0 Y 0 Cancel datum shift N120 Z 10
257. too N40 T1 G17 2000 sesenta Call tool N50 G74 P01 2 P02 15 POS 5 P04 80 P0O5 X 50 POG Y 10 PO7 120 eese meer Define slot parallel to X axis N60 GOO G40 G90 2 100 MOG Luserno Retract in the infeed axis insert tool N70 X 76 Y 15 MOS 1 eese Approach starting position spindle ON N80 Z 2 M99 Pre position in Z to setup clearance cycle call 1 N90 G74 P01 2 PO2 15 POS 5 P04 80 POS Y 80 POG X410 PO7 120 Fivel cs esee asks Define slot parallel to Y axis N100 X 20 Y 14 M99 sessi Approach starting position cycle call 2 N110 Z 100 M02 EN E OL NEA Retract in the infeed axis end of program N99999 96 810l G71 8 10 TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 Cycles 8 2 Simpie Fixed Cycles POCKET MILLING G75 G76 Process The rectangular pocket milling cycie is a roughing cycle in which the tool penetrates the workpiece at the starting position pocket center the too subsequently follows the programmed path at the specified feed rate see figure 8 9 The cutter begins milling in the positive direction of the axis of the longer side The cutter always starts in the positive Y direction on square pock ets At the end of the cycle the tool is retracted to the starting position Required tool limitations The cycle requires a center cut end mill ISO 1641 or pilot drilling at the pocket center The pocket sides are parallel to the axes of the coordinate system Fig 8 7 Infeeds
258. uilder such as tool change position nT et Ree a ee a ER UR Eom RR e E EE REEEO an ECC HCM NES I ENT ee B TTE machine open contours e Blockwise Blockwise cycle cat J cali e Automatic tool change with sister too e if maximum tool life has S SmUER ae EE Reset M101 ee ee M101 AE TE E Hx eee Lr o eee e M106 Machining with second Kvfactor M107 Suppress error message for sister tools with oversize Te Mios ReetMIOZ o ooo Constant contouring speed at too cutting edge on circular arcs increase and decrease feed rate Constant contouring speed at circular arcs feed rate decrease oniy LE Reset M109 M10 Automatic insertion of rounding arcs at non tangential straight line transitions Enter tolerance T for contour deviation MII3 RestMII2 OoOO O E Automatic compensation of machine geometry during operation with tilting Ececupu c UNE IIT axes RestM114 000000000 o sss M114 aus Feed rate for angular axes in mm min 4 M118 Superimpose handwheel positioning during program run a Th Tacceieneous PORER Mios a d MiTo6 are defied and Sriabl d by the machine builder lt Please contact your machine builder for more information a sin weet PE MEDICI UP M e m H ag E E DE TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 11 17 11 Tables Overviews and Diagrams 11 2 Misc
259. umeric keypads Close the block Ei Comments are added behind the entered blocks Example N50 GOO X 0 Y 10 PRE POSITIONING eeeeeeene nene A Comment is indicated by a semicolon at the beginning N60 G01 G41 F100 4 of the block L ADU E RN EL S DDR CEU IN wf Ta RT ER EP Ed 4 34 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 5 5 6 5 7 General Information on Programming Tool Movements 5 2 Contour Approach and Departure sees 5 4 Starting point and end point posne ee sere nscceneeneneeeceeesenessesorssnssneesseseteensssensatesssres DOE Tangential approach and departure eese seeseseeeeene nenne enne 5 6 Path Furi GtiQinS RT 5 7 G neral INFOMATION sziceisssioss E ss 5 7 Machine axis movement under program control essere OPP Overview of path FUNCTIONS eerie eese eres ce roses eene teneo dto tte sy Lea a eei tesies esias veri OOO Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates eere 5 10 GOO Straight line with rapid traverse 0 ees ccseeeeceeeecececceeeeesseeeeseeseseeneeeeeeeeeeeeranees 5 10 G01 Straight line with feed rate F esses 5 10 G24 Charmfer essei occa ions Au ost acme ose teak tis dose ita i ATH cose eid ED Circles and Circular STCS ncc cete aca an a Gavdewsvesedeet ca Sea seneecesxMecdtiesus
260. unction 2 7183 Example Q1 EXP O12 EXP Negate multiply by 1 Example Q2 NEG Q1 NEG Drop places after decimal point form an integer Example Q3 INT 042 INT Absolute value Example Q4 ABS Q22 Drop places before the decimal point form a fraction Example Q5 FRAC Q23 FRAC TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 7 Entering Formulas Directly Rules for formulas Higher level operations are performed first multiplication and division before addition and subtraction Q1 5x34 2x10 35 gt 1ststep 5x32 15 2nd step 2x 10 20 3rd step 15 20 35 Q2 SQ 10 3 3 73 gt 1ststep 10 100 2nd step 3 27 3rd step 100 27 73 Distributive law alb c ab ac Programming example Calculate an angle with arc tangent as opposite side Q12 and adjacent side Q13 then store in Q25 Shift the soft key row to the right Select arc tangent Shift the soft key row back to the ieft Open parentheses Enter parameter number Q12 Select division Enter parameter number Q13 Open parentheses conclude formula entry Resulting NC block Q25 ATAN Q12 Q13 7 18 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 8 Measuring with the 3D Touch Probe During Program Run The 3D touch probe can measure positions on the workpiece while the program is being run Applications Measuring differences in the heig
261. ur Approach and Departure at A convenient way to approach or depart the workpiece is on an arc which is tangential to the contour This is carried out with the approach departure function G26 see page 5 6 Starting point and end point Starting point A From the starting point the tool moves to the first contour point The starting point is programmed without radius compensation The starting point must be Approachable without collision Near the first contour point Located in relation to the workpiece such that no contour damage occurs when the contour is approached if the starting point is located within the shaded area of fig 5 4 the contour will be damaged when the first contour point is approached The optimum starting point is located in the extension of the tool path for machining the first contour Fig 5 3 Starting point of machining First contour point Machining begins at the first contour point The tool moves to this point with radius compensation Fig 5 4 First contour point for machining Approaching the starting point in the spindle axis M When the starting point is approached the spindle axis is moved to working depth walt x 2332 if there is danger of collision approach the starting point in the spindle E axis separately 1 Example G00G40 X Y Positioning X Y 4 Z 10 Positioning Z Fig 5 5 Separate movement of the spindle when there is danger
262. used as the circle center or pole Fig 5 23 Circle center I J Duration of circle center definition A circle center definition remains in effect until a new circle center is defined 5 16 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 Programming Tool Movements a ap ire agi 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates Entering I J K incrementally if you enter the circle center with incrementa coordinates you have programmed it relative to the last programmed position of the tool Fig 5 24 Incremental coordinates for a circle center ait The circle center J K also serves as the pole for polar coordinates The only effect of 1 J K is to define a position as a circle center the tool does not move to the position To program a circle center pole Select the first circle center designation for example I Enter the coordinate for example 20 mm Select the second circle center designation for example J Enter the coordinate for example J 10 mm Resulting NC block 1 20 J 10 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 5 17 5 Programming Tool Movements 5 4 Path Contours Cartesian Coordinates G02 G03 G05 Circular path around I J K Prerequisites The circle center J K must be previously defined in the program The tool is at the circle starting point Defining the direction of rotation Direction of rotation e Clockwise G02 e Counterclockwise G03 No definition G05 the last programmed
263. ust be enabled by the machine manufacturer The machine manufacturer determines whether the interpolation factor for each axis is set at the keyboard or with a step switch Positioning with manual data input IMDI d Machine axis movement can also be programmed in the MDI file see page 5 44 Since the programmed movements are stored in memory you can recall them and run them afterward as often as desired 24 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 Manual Operation and Setup 2 2 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M These are the soft keys in the MANUAL OPERATION and ELECTRONIC HANDWHEEL modes a a P RR TOUCH DATUM 3D lo TOOL PROBE TABLE With these functions and with the override knobs on the TNC keyboard you can change and enter miscellaneous functions M spindle speed S feed rate F only via override knob These functions are entered directly in a part program in the PROGRAMMING AND EDITING mode Fig 2 4 Knobs for spindle speed and feed rate overrides To enter the spindle speed S Select S for spindle speed Enter the desired spindle speed for example 1000 rpm Press the machine START button to confirm the entered spindle Speed The spindle speed S with the entered rpm is started with a miscellaneous function M TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 2 5 2 Manua Operation and Setup 2 2 Spindle Speed S Feed Rate F and Miscellaneous Functions M To enter a miscellane
264. ut data e Setup clearance Milling depth Slot depth The aigebraic sign determines the working direction a negative value means negative working direction Pecking depth FEED RATE FOR PECKING z Fig 8 5 X Infeeds and distances for the Traversing speed of the tool during penetration SLOT MILLING cycle FIRST SIDE LENGTH p Slot length specify the sign to determine the first milling direction e SECOND SIDE LENGTH amp Slot width e FEED RATE Traversing speed of the tool in the machining plane Fig 8 6 Side lengths of the siot TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 8 9 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles Example Slot milling A horizontal siot 50 mm x 10 mm and a vertical slot 80 mm x 10 mm are to be milled The too radius in the length direction of the slot is taken into account for the starting position Starting position slot X 76 mm Y 15mm Starting position slot X 20 mm Y 14mm SLOT DEPTH 15 mm Setup clearance 2 mm Milling depth 15 mm Pecking depth 5 mm Feed rate for pecking 80 mm min Slot length 1st milling direction Slot width 10 mm Feed rate 120 mm min SLOT MILLING cycle in a part program 9688101 G71 senem Otalt OF program i N10 G30 G17 X 0 0 zs 20 5 sss emm Define workpiece blank j N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 240 x N3O G99 T1 L 0 R44 occ cccteeseececstesceneonnes Define
265. w blocks Coordinate transformations remain active even when the cycle definition has been deleted To prepare for blockwise transfer Prepare the data interface Configure the data interface with the MOD function RS 232 422 SETUP see page 10 4 f you wish to transfer a part program from a PC interface the TNC and PC see pages 9 5 and 11 3 Ensure that the transferred program meets the following requirements PROGRAM RUN E ERE TEST RUN FILE NAME IIMMMNENEEEEEENEE RS2327F 1 H osa m h m e N oe 22742682 388 3580 3581 35 FILE S 688 SECTORS VRCRNTT PAGE SELECT i Es SELECT 21218 E Je Fig 3 1 TNC screen during blockwise transfer h N w A ul o ee ene P TDI OIDOILCTOT OI OIGITITI mon 9 dgqD OM oon 4 n o The highest block number must not exceed 99999999 The block numbers however can be repeated as often as necessary The program must not contain subprograms The program must not contain program section repeats All programs that are called from the transferred program must be selected Status M PROGRAM RUN SINGLE BLOCK TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 3 Test Run and Program Run 3 4 Blockwise Transfer Testing and Running Long Programs Jumping over blocks The TNC can jump over blocks to begin transfer at any desired block These blocks are then ignored during a program run or test run Selec
266. wish to interrupt the program run or test run for a certain length of time use the cycle G04 DWELL TIME see page 8 48 NENNEN Lp TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 23 4 Programming 4 7 Actual Position Capture Sometimes you may want to enter the actual position of the tool in a particular axis as a coordi nate in a part program Instead of reading the actual position values and entering them with the numeric keypad you can simply press the actual position capture key see illustration at right You can use this feature to enter for example the tool length E E kd Ya WM p ES Fig 4 16 Storing the actual position in the TNC To capture the actual position Move the tool to the position that you wish to capture Select or create the program biock in which you wish to enter the actual position of the tool ee X Select the axis in which you wish to capture a coordinate for example X Trensfer the actual position coordinate to the program Enter the radius compensation according to the position of the tool relative to the workpiece ERE e a A EEE 4 24 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 4 Programming 4 8 Marking Blocks for Optional Block Skip TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 You can mark program blocks so that the TNC wili skip them during 8 program or test run whenever the block skip option is active see page 3 10 To mark a block Select the desired block Mark the beginning of th
267. y from keyboard TRIGO NOME TRY DIVERSE FUNCTION FORMULR TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 1 Part Families Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values The Q parameter function DO ASSIGN assigns numerical values to Q parameters Example Q10 2 25 This enables you to use variables in the program instead of fixed numericai values Exampie X 010 X 25 You only need to write one program for a whole family of parts entering the characteristic dimen sions as Q parameters To program a particular part you then assign the appropriate values to the individual Q parameters Example Cylinder with Q parameters Radius R QI Height H Q2 Cylinder Z1 Q1 30 O2 10 Cylinder Z2 Q1 10 Q2 50 Fig 7 2 Part dimensions as Q parameters To assign numerical values to Q parameters Seiect PARAMETER Select BASIC ARITHMETIC Select DO ASSIGN Enter a value or another Q parameter whose value is to be assigned to Q5 Resulting NC block DOO Q5 P07 6 7 4 TNC 425 TNC 415 B TNC 407 7 Programming with Q Parameters 7 1 Q Parameters in Place of Numerical Values Example for exercise Full circle Circle center J Beginning and end of circular arc C Milling depth Tool radius Part program without Q parameters S5201 G71 areca E VET Eo PENES N20 G31 G90 X 100 Y 100 Z 0 N30 G99 T6 L 0 R 15 N40 T6 G17 51500
268. y of these programs by pressing the PGM NAME key To delete one or more programs press the CL PGM key The file directory contains the foliowing intormation File name File type File size in bytes characters File status Further information is shown at the top of the screen Selected file storage TNC memory External storage over RS 232 interface External storage over RS 422 interface mode e g FE1 EXT1 for external storage e File type e g H if only HEIDENHAIN dialog programs are shown Example RS 422 EXT1 amp T is displayed This means that only those files are shown that have the extension T and are located in an external storage device e g a PC that is connected to the TNC over the RS 422 interface see also Chapter 9 A soft key calis the file directory of an external data storage medium The screen is then divided into two columns Select the file directory WINDOW Files in the TNC Programs in HEIDENHAIN piain language dialog in ISO format Tables for e Tools Pallets Datums Texts as ASCII files Fig 1 35 TNC file types Task Mode of Call file directory operation with Create new files e a w PGM Edit files gt NANE CL a PGM Execute files NAME Fig 1 36 File management functions DATUM TABLE EDITING FILE NAME DERPMENENEENENE TNE 76134 79116 79152 79153 FRESADOR b
269. ys referenced to the position of the tool at the time of the cycle call and are interpreted by the contro as incremental dimensions It is not necessary to program G91 The control z assumes s that the tool i is located at clearance height over ihe workpiece at me begiing of the cycle lexcept tor SL Oo of group n TNC 407 TNC 415 B TNC 425 amp 3 8 Cycles 8 2 Simple Fixed Cycles PECKING G83 Sequence The tool drills from the starting point to the first pecking depth at the programmed feed rate When it reaches the first pecking depth the tool retracts in rapid traverse to the starting position and advances again to the first pecking depth minus the advanced stop distance t see calcula tions The tool advances with another infeed at the programmed feed rate Drilling and retracting are performed alternately until the programmed total hole depth is reached After the dwell time at the hole bottom the tool i retracted to the starting position in rapid traverse for chip breaking Fig 8 1 PECKING cycle Input data e SETUP CLEARANCE Distance between tool tip at starting position and workpiece surface TOTAL HOLE DEPTH B Distance between workpiece surface and bottom of hole tip of drill taper The algebraic sign determines the working direction a negative value means negative working direction e PECKING DEPTH infeed per cut If the TOTAL HOLE DEPTH equals the PECKING DE

ISO: User's Manual TNC 407, TNC 415B, TNC 425

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents